Ricoh sp8300 Field Service Manual

Model AL-P2
Machine Code: M132

Field Service Manual
July, 2012
Safety Notices
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the main machine and peripherals, make sure that the
power cord of the main machine is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical
voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the
main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the machine completes the warm-up period (the Start key starts
blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away from the mechanical and the electrical
components as the machine starts making prints as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
• To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and
aerosols.
Health Safety Conditions
1. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may
cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If unsuccessful, get
medical attention.
2. This machine, which uses a high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone
density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated
room.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. This machine and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has
completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced
incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends
1
replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled
in accordance with local regulations.
Handling Toner
• Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling
toner on clothing or the hands.
• If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well
ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
• If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If there are signs of
irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner. If there are
signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
• If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water. Never use
hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric.
• Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages, cartridges, and
bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges) out of the reach of children.
• Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location that is not
exposed to direct sunlight.
• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Vacuumed toner may
cause a fire or explosion due to sparks or electrical contact inside the cleaner. However, it is
possible to use a cleaner designed to be dust explosion-proof. If toner is spilled over the floor,
sweep up spilled toner slowly and clean up any remaining toner with a wet cloth.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an
open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic
photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100
batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical
reactions and heat build-up.
2
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
• Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this
manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
• Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit
section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
3
Conventions in this Manual
Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations
are as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
Cautions, Notes, etc.
The following headings provide special information:
• FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH.
• Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
4
• This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Safety Notices.....................................................................................................................................................1
Important Safety Notices............................................................................................................................... 1
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal................................................................................................... 2
Laser Safety.....................................................................................................................................................3
Conventions in this Manual................................................................................................................................4
Symbols and Abbreviations...........................................................................................................................4
Cautions, Notes, etc.......................................................................................................................................4
1. Product Information
Specifications....................................................................................................................................................13
Machine Configuration....................................................................................................................................14
Printer............................................................................................................................................................ 14
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products..............................................................16
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 17
Component Layout.......................................................................................................................................17
Paper Path.................................................................................................................................................... 18
Drive Layout..................................................................................................................................................19
2. Installation
Installation Requirements................................................................................................................................. 21
Environment.................................................................................................................................................. 21
Machine Level.............................................................................................................................................. 22
Minimum Space Requirements................................................................................................................... 22
Power Requirements.................................................................................................................................... 23
Main Machine Installation...............................................................................................................................24
Installation Overview...................................................................................................................................24
Power Socket for Peripheral........................................................................................................................25
Installation Flow Chart.................................................................................................................................26
Moving the Machine................................................................................................................................... 26
Transporting the Machine........................................................................................................................... 26
1200-sheet LCT Installation (D631)...............................................................................................................28
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 28
Installation Procedure.................................................................................................................................. 28
Side Fence Position Change....................................................................................................................... 31
Bridge Unit Installation (D634).......................................................................................................................33
6
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 33
1000-sheet Finisher (D588)........................................................................................................................... 39
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................39
3000-sheet Finisher (D636)........................................................................................................................... 43
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................43
Punch Unit Installation (D570)........................................................................................................................ 49
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 49
Output Jogger Unit Installation (B703).......................................................................................................... 55
Accessory Check List....................................................................................................................................55
Tray Heater.......................................................................................................................................................58
Tray Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit)........................................................................................................60
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 60
External USB Keyboard Installation............................................................................................................... 68
Controller Options............................................................................................................................................70
Overview...................................................................................................................................................... 70
Application Merge...................................................................................................................................... 73
3. Preventive Maintenance
PM Tables......................................................................................................................................................... 77
4. Replacement and Adjustment
General Cautions............................................................................................................................................. 79
Laser Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 79
Used Toner................................................................................................................................................... 79
Special Tools and Lubricants...........................................................................................................................80
Special Tools................................................................................................................................................ 80
Lubricants......................................................................................................................................................80
7
Exterior Covers................................................................................................................................................. 81
Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover............................................................................................... 81
Left Cover......................................................................................................................................................82
Rear Cover................................................................................................................................................... 82
Right Rear Cover..........................................................................................................................................83
Top Right and Top Rear Cover................................................................................................................... 84
Operation Panel...........................................................................................................................................84
Paper Exit Cover.......................................................................................................................................... 86
Output Tray.................................................................................................................................................. 87
Laser Unit.......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Caution Decal Locations............................................................................................................................. 89
Laser Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 90
Polygon Mirror Motor................................................................................................................................. 91
Laser Synchronization Detector.................................................................................................................. 91
LD Unit...........................................................................................................................................................92
PCDU.................................................................................................................................................................95
PCDU (Photoconductor and Development Unit)....................................................................................... 95
Drum..............................................................................................................................................................96
Pick-off Pawls................................................................................................................................................98
Charge Roller and Cleaning Roller............................................................................................................ 99
Drum Cleaning Blade................................................................................................................................100
ID Sensor....................................................................................................................................................100
Development.................................................................................................................................................. 102
Development Filter.....................................................................................................................................102
Development Roller................................................................................................................................... 102
Developer.................................................................................................................................................. 105
TD Sensor................................................................................................................................................... 107
Transfer........................................................................................................................................................... 109
Transfer Belt Unit........................................................................................................................................109
Transfer Belt............................................................................................................................................... 109
Toner Overflow Sensor............................................................................................................................. 112
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade....................................................................................................................112
Paper Feed..................................................................................................................................................... 113
8
Paper Feed Unit......................................................................................................................................... 113
Pick-Up, Feed and Separation Rollers.....................................................................................................114
Tray Lift Motor............................................................................................................................................115
Relay, Tray Lift, Paper End and Paper Feed Sensors............................................................................. 115
Registration Sensor....................................................................................................................................116
Fusing..............................................................................................................................................................119
Fusing Unit..................................................................................................................................................119
Web Roller Unit......................................................................................................................................... 119
Brake Pad...................................................................................................................................................120
Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers...................................................................................................... 121
Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller................................................................................................................ 124
Thermostats................................................................................................................................................ 125
Thermistor...................................................................................................................................................126
Hot Roller Strippers................................................................................................................................... 126
Fusing Lamps..............................................................................................................................................127
Hot Roller and Pressure Roller..................................................................................................................129
Paper Exit........................................................................................................................................................131
Paper Exit Unit........................................................................................................................................... 131
Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, and Paper Exit Sensors............................................................................ 131
Junction Jam Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 132
Paper Exit Motor........................................................................................................................................132
Duplex............................................................................................................................................................ 134
Duplex Unit................................................................................................................................................ 134
Right Door Cover.......................................................................................................................................137
Duplex Door Sensor..................................................................................................................................137
Duplex Entrance Sensor............................................................................................................................138
Duplex Exit Sensor.................................................................................................................................... 139
Duplex/By-pass Motor.............................................................................................................................141
Duplex Inverter Motor...............................................................................................................................142
By-pass........................................................................................................................................................... 144
By-pass Paper Size Sensor/By-pass Paper Length Sensor................................................................... 144
By-pass Paper End Sensor........................................................................................................................146
By-pass Pick-up, Feed and Separation Roller, Torque Limiter...............................................................147
9
By-pass Feed Clutch..................................................................................................................................148
Drive Area...................................................................................................................................................... 149
Paper Feed Clutch..................................................................................................................................... 149
Development Paddle Motor..................................................................................................................... 149
Transfer/Development Motor.................................................................................................................. 150
Drum Motor............................................................................................................................................... 151
Fusing Motor..............................................................................................................................................151
Web Motor................................................................................................................................................ 152
Paper Feed Motor..................................................................................................................................... 153
Transfer Belt Contact Motor..................................................................................................................... 153
Registration Motor.....................................................................................................................................154
Toner Supply Motor.................................................................................................................................. 154
Electrical Components...................................................................................................................................156
Controller Unit........................................................................................................................................... 156
Controller Board........................................................................................................................................156
After Installing the Controller Board........................................................................................................ 159
Mother Board............................................................................................................................................ 159
BCU............................................................................................................................................................ 162
Bridge Board............................................................................................................................................. 164
IOB............................................................................................................................................................. 164
PSU............................................................................................................................................................. 165
High Voltage Power Supply..................................................................................................................... 165
Fusing Exhaust Fan.................................................................................................................................... 166
Controller Fan............................................................................................................................................ 166
SD USB Board........................................................................................................................................... 167
LCDC Board...............................................................................................................................................168
Print Adjustments............................................................................................................................................ 170
Overview....................................................................................................................................................170
Printing........................................................................................................................................................170
Touch Screen Calibration......................................................................................................................... 174
5. Service Tables
Service Program Mode................................................................................................................................. 177
Service Program Mode Operation.......................................................................................................... 177
10
Service Program Mode Tables.................................................................................................................177
Service Program Mode Tables..................................................................................................................... 179
SP Tables....................................................................................................................................................179
Service Main SP Tables.................................................................................................................................180
SP1-xxx...................................................................................................................................................... 180
Engine Main SP Tables-1..............................................................................................................................189
SP1-xxx: Feed............................................................................................................................................189
SP2-xxx: Drum........................................................................................................................................... 198
SP3-xxx: Process....................................................................................................................................... 203
SP5-xxx: Mode..........................................................................................................................................205
SP6-xxx: Peripherals................................................................................................................................. 252
SP7-xxx: Data Log.....................................................................................................................................259
SP8-XXX: Data Log2................................................................................................................................. 273
Input Check Table..................................................................................................................................... 296
Output Check Table.................................................................................................................................. 305
3000-Sheet Finisher (D636)....................................................................................................................311
Updating the Firmware..................................................................................................................................313
Before You Begin.......................................................................................................................................313
Updating Firmware................................................................................................................................... 313
Handling Firmware Update Errors...........................................................................................................316
Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data....................................................................................................318
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824)......................................................................................................318
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825)................................................................................................. 319
Self-Diagnostic Mode................................................................................................................................... 321
Self-Diagnostic Mode at Power On.........................................................................................................321
11
Self-Diagnostic Test Flow.......................................................................................................................... 322
Detailed Self-Diagnostic Mode................................................................................................................323
Using the Debug Log..................................................................................................................................... 324
Overview....................................................................................................................................................324
Switching On And Setting Up Save Debug Log..................................................................................... 324
SMC List Card Save Function....................................................................................................................... 330
Overview....................................................................................................................................................330
Procedure...................................................................................................................................................330
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists......................................................................................................... 332
Error Messages..........................................................................................................................................333
6. Troubleshooting
Service Call Conditions.................................................................................................................................335
Summary.................................................................................................................................................... 335
SC Code Descriptions...............................................................................................................................336
Electrical Component Defects.......................................................................................................................397
Sensors....................................................................................................................................................... 397
Switches..................................................................................................................................................... 400
Blown Fuse Conditions.................................................................................................................................. 401
Fuses............................................................................................................................................................... 402
7. Energy Saving
Energy Save................................................................................................................................................... 403
Energy Saver Modes................................................................................................................................ 403
Energy Save Effectiveness........................................................................................................................ 404
Paper Save..................................................................................................................................................... 406
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function............................................................................................ 406
12
Specifications
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Optional Equipment
13
Machine Configuration
Printer
Key: Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products
Item Callout Key Machine Code
Main
M132 [1] - M132
Frame
14
Machine Configuration
Item Callout Key Machine Code
Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit [2] C D580
2000-sheet LCT [3] C D581
1200-sheet LCT [4] C D631
Bridge Unit [5] C D634
1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 1) [6] C D588
External 3000-Sheet Finisher (See Note 1) [7] C D636

Options D570-00 (2/3-hole)
-Punch Unit (See Note 2) - C
(NA)
D570-01 (2/4-hole)
(EU)
D570-02 (4-hole)
(Scandinavia)
-Output Jogger Unit (See Note 2) [8] C B703
HDD - U M416
Memory Unit 512 MB - C D594
IPDS Unit - C M416
Netware - C M416
Internal VM Card - C D640

Options
Font SD Card - C D641 (EU)
G874 (EU)
Gigabit Ethernet - C
M394 (NA)
IEEE 802.11a/g, g - C M344
IEEE 1284 - C B679
NOTE:
1. The finisher requires the bridge unit and two-tray paper feed unit or 2000-sheet LCT. The 1000-
sheet finisher and 3000-sheet finisher cannot be installed together.
2. The punch unit and output jogger unit requires the 3000-sheet finisher.
15
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with

Predecessor Products
The M132 series are successor models to the G179 series. If you have experience with the predecessor
products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual.
Different Points from Predecessor Products

M132 G179
Controller Type GW+ Controller GW Controller
Operation Panel 4.3” touch panel includes USB/SD 4-line LCD

slot
USB2.0/SD Slot Standard Not supported
Light Detect Function Available Not supported
SMC data SD card down load or printing Printing only
Safety Shut Down Available Not Available

Function
PDF Direct Standard Not supported
Data Overwrite Security Standard Option
HDD Encryption Standard Option
16
Overview
Overview
Component Layout
1 Paper Exit Sensor 17 By-pass Feed Roller
2 Paper Overflow Sensor 18 By-pass Separation Roller
3 Junction Gate 1 19 Duplex/by-pass transport roller
4 Junction Jam Sensor 20 Upper Relay Belt
5 Duplex Inverter Gate 21 Feed Roller
6 Junction Gate 2 22 Separation Roller
17
7 Duplex Entrance Sensor 23 Pick-up Roller
8 Duplex Inverter Roller 24 Bottom Plate
9 Hot Roller 25 Development Unit
10 Pressure Roller 26 Charge Roller
11 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 27 F Mirror
12 Duplex Transport Roller 28 Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)
13 Transfer Belt 29 Polygonal Mirror Motor
14 OPC Drum 30 Laser Unit
15 Registration Roller 31 Toner Bottle Holder
16 By-pass Pick-up Roller 32 Fusing Exit Sensor
33 Exit Roller
Paper Path
1 Duplex Unit
18
Overview
2 By-pass Tray
3 Large Capacity Tray (LCT: 1200-sheet)
4 Paper Tray Unit
5 Two-Tray Finisher
6 Bridge Unit
Drive Layout
1 Paper Exit Motor 9 Paper Feed Clutch 2
2 Fusing Motor 10 Paper Feed Clutch 1
3 Web Motor 11 Feed Motor
19
4 Transfer/Development Motor 12 By-pass Paper Feed Clutch
5 Drum Motor 13 Registration Motor
6 Development Paddle Motor 14 Duplex/By-pass Motor
7 Tray Lift Motor 1 15 Transfer Belt Contact Motor
8 Tray Lift Motor 2 16 Duplex Inverter Motor
20
2. Installation
Installation Requirements
• Install the machine in a safe place for keeping security.

• Make sure that the operation instructions are kept at a customer's hand.
Environment
Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 90°F)
Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.)
Ventilation: Room air should turn at least 30 m3/hr/person
Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10/6 oz/yd3)
21
2. Installation
1. Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:

1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
2. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
3. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
4. Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side should be no more
than 5 mm (0.2").
5. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Minimum Space Requirements
Place the main machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
• Front [A]: Over 75 cm (29.6")
22
Installation Requirements
• Left [B]: 10 cm (4")

• Rear [C]: 10 cm (4")
• Right [D]: 55 cm (21.7")
• The 75 cm (29.6") recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the paper tray only. If
the operator stands at the front of the main machine, more space is required.
Power Requirements
• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible. Make sure the plug
is firmly inserted in the outlet.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:

North America 120 V to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A
Europe/Asia 220 V to 240V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 7 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation:
For printing images For operating
North America +8.66 / -10 % +8.66 / -15 %
Others +/-10 % +/-15 %
3. Never set anything on the power cord.
23
2. Installation
Main Machine Installation

Installation Overview
The installation procedures of the following items are in the Operating Instructions:
Main Machine and Hardware Options
• Printer M132 (main machine) Installation
• Paper Feed Unit: D580
• LCIT PB3140: D581
Controller Options
• HDD: M416
• Data Storage Card: D594
• IEEE1284 Interface Board: B679
• IEEE802.11a/g Interface Unit: M344
• Gigabit Ethernet: G874 (EU only), M394 (NA only)
• VM Card: D640
• IPDS Unit: M416
• SD Card for Netware Printing: M416
• SD Card for fonts: D641 (EU only)
• The bridge unit (D634) and either the 2,000-sheet LCT (D581) or the paper tray (D580) must be
installed before the finisher SR3120 (D636) or SR3090 (D588) is installed.
The installation procedures of the following options are in this service manual:
Hardware Options
• LCIT RT3020: D631
• Bridge Unit: D634 (for Finisher SR3120 and SR3090)
• Finisher SR3120: D636
• Punch Unit: D570 (for Finisher SR3120)
• Jogger Unit: B703 (for Finisher SR3120)
• Finisher SR3090: D588
24
Power Socket for Peripheral
• Rating voltage for peripheral: Make sure to plug the cable into the correct socket.
25
2. Installation
Installation Flow Chart
Moving the Machine
This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the
section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.
1. Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.
Transporting the Machine
1. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of
paper and tape.
2. Do one of the following:
26
• Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.

• Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
27
2. Installation
1200-sheet LCT Installation (D631)

Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No. Description Q'ty
1 Front Bracket 1
2 Rear Bracket 1
3 Stud Screw 4
4 Joint Pin 2
5 LCT 1
Installation Procedure
• Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
• The Paper Tray Unit (D580) or LCT 2000-sheet (D581) must be installed before installing this
1200-sheet LCT.
28
1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes.

2. Remove the stand covers [A].
3. Release the locks [B] of the front and rear caster stands.
4. Remove the caster stands [C].
5. Remove the paper path cover [A], connector cover [B] and six hole covers [C].
29
2. Installation
6. Insert the joint pins [A].

7. Attach the front [B] and rear brackets [C]. ( x2 each)
8. Pull out the front and rear rails [A], and then hang them on each bracket [B].
9. Connect the LCT cable [C] to the main machine.
10. Slide the LCT [D] into the main machine.
11. Make sure that the front and rear sides of the LCT are closely attached to the main machine.
30
Side Fence Position Change
1. Open the right door of the LCT.

2. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position.
3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).

4. Install the side fences in the correct position (A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF).
5. Pull the end fence [A] for B5 size paper as shown ( x 1) if the side fences are adjusted for B5 size
paper.
31
2. Installation
6. Close the right door.

7. Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode.
8. Input the correct paper size for the 1200-sheet LCT with SP5181-017.
32
Bridge Unit Installation (D634)

Component Check
No. Description Q’ty
1 Bridge Unit 1
2 Frame Cover 1
3 Knob Screw 1
4 Long Knob Screw 1
5 Holder Bracket Cover 1
6 Guide 2
• Unplug the power cord of the main machine before starting the following procedure.
33
2. Installation
• If you will install the finisher unit (D588, D636) on the machine, install it after installing the bridge
unit (D634).
1. Remove all tapes.
2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it into the machine.
3. Remove the operation panel cover [A] ( x 1).
34
4. Remove the inner tray [A].

5. Remove the connector cover [B] ( x 1).
6. Attach the two guides [A] to the cutouts in the paper exit.
35
2. Installation
1) Place the lower hook of the guide in the cutout of the paper exit.
2) Attach the guide as shown until the two side hooks hold the paper exit.
3) Press the guide.
4) Press down the guide as shown.
7. Install the bridge unit [A] in the machine.
36
8. Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw [A].
9. Open the bridge unit cover [A].

10. Secure the bridge unit with knob screw [B].
11. Attach the frame cover [A].
37
2. Installation
12. Close the bridge unit cover.

13. Reinstall the machine.
14. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure).
• The holder bracket [A] is used in the installation procedure of the finisher (D588, D636). Do
not install it at this time.
15. Pull out the extension tray [A] only if the 1000-sheet finisher (D588) will be installed on the main
machine.
16. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
17. Check the bridge unit operation.
38
1000-sheet Finisher (D588)

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q'ty For this model
1 Grounding Plate 1 Yes
2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 Not used
3 Front Joint Bracket 1 Yes
4 Rear Joint Bracket 1 Yes
5 Copy Tray 1 Yes
6 Screw - M3 x 8 1 Yes
7 Screw - M4 x 13 4 Yes
8 Knob Screw - M3 x 8 1 Yes
9 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 1 Yes
10 Screw - M4 x 25 3 Not used
11 Staple Position Decal 1 Not used
39
2. Installation
If this finisher is installed, the Bridge Unit (D634) and Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581) must be
installed before installing this finisher.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
40
• Be sure to keep screw [A]. It will be needed to secure the grounding plate in step 3.
2. Install the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2; M4 x 13) and front joint bracket [B] ( x 2; M4 x 13).
• Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket is provided
with the Bridge Unit (D634).
41
2. Installation
3. Install the grounding plate [A] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 8)
• Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box.
4. Open the front door [B]. Then pull the locking lever [C].
5. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever.
6. Secure the locking lever ( x 1; knob M3 x 8) and close the front door.
7. Install the copy tray [D] ( x 1; knob M4 x 10).
8. Connect the finisher cable [E] to the main machine as shown above.
9. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
42

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
1 Rear joint bracket 1
2 Front joint bracket 1
3 Ground (earth) plate 1
4 Tapping screws - M4 x14 4
5 Tapping screws - M3 x 8 1
6 Tapping screws - M3 x 6 6
7 Upper output tray 1
8 Support Tray 1
9 Cushion (with double-sided tape) 1
10 Small Ground (earth) plate 2
43
2. Installation
If this finisher is installed on this machine, the following options must be installed before installing this
finisher.
• Bridge Unit (D634)
• Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCIT (D581)
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher.
44
2. Open the front door, and then remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the
finisher.
3. Pull out the jogger unit [A], and then remove all tapes and retainers.
45
2. Installation
4. Attach the cushion [A] to the finisher.
• Make sure that the cushion is placed within 0 to 1 mm from the edge of the cover.
5. Install the ground plate [B] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 6).
6. Install the small ground plates [C] on the finisher( x 2; M3 x 6 each).
7. Attach the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2; M4 x 14).

8. Attach the front joint bracket [B] and the holder bracket [C] ( x 2; M4 x 14).
46
• Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket is provided
with the Bridge Unit (D634).
9. Pull the lock lever [A] ( x 1).

10. Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine, keeping its front door open until the brackets
[B] [C] go into their slots.
11. Push the lock lever [A], and then secure it ( x 1).
12. Close the front door of the finisher.
13. Connect the finisher connector [D] to the machine.
14. Install the upper output tray [A] ( x 1; M3 x 8).
47
2. Installation
15. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.

16. Check the finisher operation.
Support Tray Installation
If a stacking problem occurs several times on the upper output tray [A], put the support tray [B] on the
tray as shown.
48
Punch Unit Installation (D570)

The Punch Unit D570 can be installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher D636.
Component Check
1 Punch-out Waste Unit 1
2 Slide Drive Unit 1
3 Punch Waste Hopper 1
4 Wire harness: short-circuit 1
5 Screws (M3 x 6) 5
6 Side-to-Side Detection Unit 1
7 Punching Unit 1
49
2. Installation
• Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the 3000-sheet
finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect the power connector [A] and separate the
finisher from the machine.
3. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2) and open the front door.
• At the base of the back cover, be sure to disconnect the tabs that fasten the cover to the frame.
4. Remove the guide plate [C] ( x 2).
50
5. Remove the shipping retainer [A] ( x 2) from the punch unit.
6. Move the punch unit [A] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that the pin engages correctly at
the front and rear.
7. Connect the cables [B] of the finisher to the connectors (CN601 and CN602) on the punch unit
board ( x 2, x 1).
• The cables [B] are coiled and attached to the PCB.
51
2. Installation
8. Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit ( x 2, x 1). Push in
the slide drive unit at when you attach the screw .
9. Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws.
10. Put the side-to-side detection unit [A] in the machine. Make sure that the two pins are engaged
correctly at the front.
11. Make sure that the side-to-side detection unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure
that the rails are aligned with their grooves.
12. Attach the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear ( x 2, x 1, x 1).
13. Pull the short connector out of the connector [B], then connect the cable of the finisher ( x 1).
• This is the 3-pin connector.
52
14. Connect "Wire harness: short-circuit" [A] to the CN110 connector.
15. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover.
16. Install the punch-waste transport unit [B] in the finisher.
17. Make sure that the punch-waste transport unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure
that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
18. Remove the short connector from the connector [C].
• This is the 4-pin connector.
53
2. Installation
19. Connect the cable to connector [C] and attach the punch-waste transport unit ( x 1, x 1, x
1).
20. Set the hopper [A] in its holder.

21. Reassemble the finisher, and then install it on the main machine.
22. Connect the power cord to the outlet, and then turn the main power switch on.
23. Check the punch unit operation.
54
Output Jogger Unit Installation (B703)

Accessory Check List
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
1 Jogger Unit 1
2 Tapping Screws M3x6 2
The Output Jogger Unit B703 is installed only on the 3000-Sheet Finisher D636.
• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following
procedures.
1. Turn the main machine switch off.

2. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
55
2. Installation
3. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A].
4. Remove the cover plate [A] ( x 2). Keep the screws.
56
5. While holding the jogger unit with the connector on the left, put the hooks on the frame of the
jogger unit [A] into the holes in the left and right side of the finisher frame.
6. Connect connector [B] to the socket ( x 1).
7. Attach the jogger unit [C] to the finisher ( x 2).
8. Reattach the jogger unit cover [D] to the jogger unit ( x 2).
57
2. Installation
Tray Heater
1. Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.

2. Connect the connector [A] of the heater to the connector [B] of the main machine.
3. Install the heater [C] inside the machine ( x 1).
4. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
58
Tray Heater
5. Release the heater relay connector [A] ( x 1).

6. Connect the heater relay connector to the connector [B] (front side) of the main frame ( x 1).
7. Reassemble the machine.
59
2. Installation
Tray Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit)

Component Check
No. Description Q'ty For this model
1 Tray heater 1 Yes
2 On-standby decal 1 Not used
3 Harness 2 1 Not used
4 Harness 1 1 Yes
5 Screw M4 x 10 2 Yes
- Installation procedure 1 Yes
• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
60
For installing the tray heater in the D580 (Two-tray paper feed unit)
1. Pull out the two trays from the optional paper feed unit.
2. Install the tray heater [A] in the optional paper feed unit ( x 1).
3. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe.
4. Replace the shoulder screw [A] with the washer screw [B], using the securing bracket [C] ( x 1).
61
2. Installation
5. Remove the two securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [B] of the optional
paper feed unit ( x 2).
6. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [B] of the tray heater.
7. Route the harness [A] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
8. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [C] of the mainframe.
62
10. Release the optional heater relay connector [A] ( x 1).

11. Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [B] (rear side) of the main frame (
x 1).
12. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit.
For installing the tray heater in the D581 (LCT)
1. Remove the rear cover of the mainframe ( x 6).

2. Pull out the LCT drawer.
• If the right tray comes out with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT.
63
2. Installation
3. Left tray [A] ( x 2)
4. Remove the right tray [A] while pressing down the stopper [B].
• When reinstalling the right tray, set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray
in, making sure to keep the tray level.
64
5. Install the tray heater [A] in the optional LCT ( x 1).

6. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe.
7. Replace the shoulder screw [A] with the washer screw [B], using the securing bracket [C] ( x 1).
65
2. Installation
8. Remove the two securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [B] of the optional LCT
( x 2).
9. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [B] of the tray heater.
10. Route the harness [A] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
11. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [C] of the mainframe.
12. Reassemble the rear cover of the optional LCT.
66
14. Release the optional heater relay connector [A] ( x 1).

15. Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [B] (rear side) of the main frame (
x 1).
16. Reassemble the mainframe and optional LCT.
67
2. Installation
External USB Keyboard Installation

Customers can use an external USB keyboard when the software keyboard is shown on the operation
panel, if an external USB keyboard is connected to the USB port at the side of the operation panel or
the controller box USB port.
If customers would like to use an external USB keyboard, execute the following steps to enable this
feature.
1. Connect the external keyboard to the USB port at the right side of the operation panel or the
controller box USB port.
• The external keyboard that is available in this machine is principally for the Windows OS.
However, no compatibility check is done, and there is no warranty.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select “Engine” SP.
4. Select “5075 USB Keyboard”.
5. Press [10Key] to open the number entry screen.
6. Enter “1” then press [OK]. This switches the USB Keyboard feature on.
68
External USB Keyboard Installation
7. Exit the SP mode and turn the main power off and on.
8. Select a language type for the external USB keyboard with [User Tools] > [System Settings] >
[General Features] > [External Keyboard].
9. Press [OK] to set it.
10. Turn the main power off and on.
69
2. Installation
Controller Options
Overview
This section describes the installation procedures for controller options for M132 series machines.
Controller Options
No. Item Slots
Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A

G874
(EU only)
Gigabit Ethernet Board Type C

M394
(NA only)
IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type L Board Slot. Only one of these boards
-or- can be installed at one time.
M344 IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type M

-or-
IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type P
B679 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A
M416 IPDS Unit Type 8300 SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot)
D640 VM Card Type U SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot)
M416 SD Card for NetWare printing Type N SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot)
SD Card for Fonts Type D

D641 SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot)
(EU only)
M416 Hard Disk Drive Option Type 8300

Controller Board
D594 Memory Unit Type L 512MB
• If more than one SD card application is required, the applications must be moved to one SD card
with SP5873-1. For more details about merging applications from SD card Slot 2 (Lower Slot) to
Slot 1 (Upper Slot), see “Application Merge” in this section.
70
Controller Options
Board, SD Card Slots
The machine controller box has one board slot and two SD card slots.
Only one interface board option can be installed.
Only two SD cards are available for applications and maintenance.
No. Name Description
1 USB-A Both USB slots are used for a card authentication device.
2 USB-B Built-in for connection of USB devices (USB 2.0)
3 SD Card Slot 1 For options provided on SD cards. The application SD card can
(Upper Slot) be installed in Slot 1 (Upper Slot). If two or more applications are
to be used, move the applications to the same SD card with
SP5873-1.
4 SD Card Slot 2 For servicing.

(Lower Slot)
5 Ethernet Standard LAN connection point.

100BASE-TX/10BASE-T LAN
• Orange LED: Lights when 100BASE-TX is operating.
• Green LED: Lights when 10BASE-TX is operating.
6 Board Slot Optional interface boards are installed here.
71
2. Installation
• Only two SD Card slots are available for applications.

• To install more applications, they must be moved onto one SD Card.
• Board Slot:
The following optional interface boards are available. There is only one board slot so only one can
be installed.
No. Interface Board
G874 Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A (EU)
M394 Gigabit Ethernet Board Type C (NA)
IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type L

-or-
M344 IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type M
-or-
IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type P
B679 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A
• Only one of these boards can be installed at one time.

• SD Card Slot:
The following options are provided on SD cards.
• Two SD card slots are available.
• Options provided on SD cards should be installed in Slot 1 (Upper Slot). If more than one
application is required, applications can be moved onto one SD card with SP5873-1.
No. SD Card Applications
M416 IPDS Unit Type 8300
M416 SD card for NetWare printing Type N
D641 SD Card for Fonts Type D (EU only)
D640 VM Card Type U
72
Controller Options
Application Merge
Overview
This machine has two SD card slots only. However, more than two optional applications are supplied for
this machine. Always keep SD card Slot 2 (Lower Slot) vacant for servicing. Because of this, SD card
merge is required if a customer wants to use many applications.
The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) lets you to copy application programs from one
SD card to another SD card.
You can move application programs from Slot 2 (Lower Slot) to Slot 1 (Upper Slot).
Important Notes about SD Card Appli Move
1. Consider the following limitations when you try to merge SD cards.

The destination SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards. Refer
to the following table for the memory size of each SD card.
SD Card Options SD Card Size
IPDS Unit Type 8003 128 MB
SD card for NetWare printing Type N 128 MB
VM Card Type U 256 MB
SD Card for Fonts Type D (EU only) 128 MB
2. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card
to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the application
program from one card to another card.
3. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
73
2. Installation
4. Remove the lower inner cover [A] ( p.81 "Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover"), and
then keep the SD card in the place [B] after you move the application program from one card to
another card. This is done for the following reasons:
• The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
• You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
5. Before storing the card from which an application has been copied, label it carefully so that you
can identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure later.
Move Exec
The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original SD card
to another SD card.
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the
machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
74
Controller Options
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1).

3. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot). The application program is copied
into this SD card.
4. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot). The
application program is copied from this SD card.
5. Turn the main switch on.
6. Start the SP mode.
7. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.”
8. Touch “Execute”.
9. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
11. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
13. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
Check that the application programs run normally.
• User Tools > Printer Features > List / Test Print > Configuration Page
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
14. Turn the main switch off again, and then reattach the SD card slot cover.
Undo Exec
The menu “Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to
the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some
programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
75
2. Installation
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the
machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot). The application program is copied back
into this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot). The
application program is copied back from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 “Undo Exec.”
7. Touch “Execute”.
8. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
• This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine.
12. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.
13. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
Check that the application programs run normally.
• User Tools > Printer Features > List / Test Print > Configuration Page
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
14. Turn the main switch off again, and then reattach the SD card slot cover.
76
PM Tables
• PM Tables
77
78
General Cautions
• To avoid damage to the transfer belt, drum, or development unit when it is removed or re-installed,
never turn off power switch while electrical components are active.
• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the procedures in
this section.
Laser Unit
1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing. Doing so would
throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the factory.
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open the optical housing
unit.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.
5. After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment.
Used Toner
Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner into an open flame, for
toner dust may ignite.
79
Special Tools and Lubricants

Special Tools
Part Number Description Q’ty
A2309003 Adjustment Cam – Laser Unit 1
A2309004 Positioning Pin – Laser Unit 1
B6455010 SD Card 128MB 1
B6455020 SD Card 1GB 1
G0219350 Loop Back Connector: Parallel *1 1
B6795100 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C 1
*1 “Loop Back Connector: Parallel” requires “Plug - IEEE1284 Type C”.
• A PC (Personal Computer) is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card when
replacing the controller board for a model in which HDD encryption has been enabled.
Lubricants
Part Number Description Q’ty
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
52039502 Silicone Grease G501 1
80
Exterior Covers
Exterior Covers
Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover
1. Left Cover ( p.82)
2. Open and remove the front door [A] (pin x 2).
Upper Inner Cover
1. Open the front door [A].

2. Upper inner cover [B] ( x 2)
Lower Inner Cover
1. Remove the front door [A] (pin x 2)

2. Shield glass cover [C]
3. Shield glass [D] ( x 2)
4. Lower inner cover [E]
81
Left Cover
1. Left cover [A] ( x 6)
Rear Cover
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 6)
82
Exterior Covers
Right Rear Cover
1. Rear cover ( p.82)

2. Top right and top rear cover ( p.84)
3. Open the right door [A].
4. Right rear cover [A] ( x 4)
83
Top Right and Top Rear Cover
1. Remove the screw caps [A].

2. Top right cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Top rear cover [C] ( x 3)
Operation Panel

2. Top right cover ( p.84 "Top Right and Top Rear Cover")
84
Exterior Covers
3. Operation panel cover [A] ( x 1)
4. Operation panel unit [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 2)
85
5. Operation panel bracket [A] (small x 3)
6. Operation panel [A]
When Installing the New Operation Panel
Do the touch screen calibration after you replace the operation panel. ( p.174 "Touch Screen
Calibration")
Paper Exit Cover
1. Top right cover ( p.84 "Top Right and Top Rear Cover")
2. Operation panel unit ( p.84 "Operation Panel")
86
Exterior Covers
3. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1)
Output Tray
1. Left cover ( p.82)

2. Upper inner cover ( p.81 "Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover")
3. Paper exit cover ( p.86)
4. Top rear cover [A] (screw cap x 1, x 3)
87
5. Connector cover [A] ( x 1)
6. Inner rear cover [A] ( x 2)
7. Output tray [A]
88
Laser Unit
Laser Unit
• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the procedures in
this section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
Caution Decal Locations
Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below. (See the next page for removal
instructions.)
89
Laser Unit
1. Open the front door.

2. Front door [A] (pins x 2)
3. Upper inner cover [B] ( x 2)
4. Glass cap [C]
5. Shield glass [D]
6. Lower inner cover [E] ( x 2)
7. Laser unit connectors [E] ( x 3, x 1)
90
Laser Unit
• Do not disconnect the harnesses on the LD board [F] unless the LD unit has to be replaced.
This board is precisely adjusted in the factory.
8. Laser unit [G] ( x 2)
• When sliding out the laser unit, do not hold the LD board. Hold the laser unit.
Polygon Mirror Motor
1. Laser unit ( p.90)

2. Laser unit cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1)
4. After replacing the polygon mirror motor, do the image adjustment ( p.170 "Print
Adjustments").
Laser Synchronization Detector
91
2. Laser synchronization detector [A] ( x1, x1)
LD Unit
2. Upper spring plate [A] ( x 1)

3. Lower spring plate [B] ( x 1)
4. LD unit [C] ( x 1, x1, spring x 1)
• To avoid damaging the LD board, hold it securely when disconnecting the connectors. Hold
the laser unit casing.
92
Laser Unit
5. After replacing the LD board, do the "Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment" (described in the following
section). Keep the lower inner cover removed before doing this adjustment because you need to
adjust the adjustor screw [D] on the LD unit with a screwdriver.
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment
1. Install a (new) LD unit [A] with the left side of the LD unit being lower than the right side. (This makes
this adjustment easier.)
2. Print the test pattern "Hounds Tooth Check (Horizontal)" (No. 16 in SP2109-001).
3. Check if the vertical stripes appear on the second pattern (counted from the leading edge) of the
printout.
• Correct: No vertical stripes appear (see the sample following this procedure.)
• Wrong: Vertical stripes appear (see the sample following this procedure.)
4. Turn the adjustor screw [B] by 90 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise).
• If the image of the printout is getting worse, try reverse rotation (clockwise
counterclockwise)
5. Print the test pattern and check it out.
6. Try steps 2 to 4 again until you get an image with no vertical stripes.
7. Reassemble the machine after completing this adjustment.
93
Correct: No vertical stripes appear
Incorrect: Vertical stripes appear
94
PCDU
PCDU
PCDU (Photoconductor and Development Unit)

3. Release the lock lever [B].
4. Pull out the PCDU [C] and place it on a clean flat surface.
95
• When you pull out the PCDU, push the security lock [A] of the PCDU. If the lock is not pressed,
the PCDU will be stuck in the machine and cannot be pulled out completely. The lock prevents
the PCDU from coming out accidentally.
• You don’t need to push the security lock when installing a PCDU.
5. Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface.
• Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid attraction to the magnetic
development roller.
Reinstallation
Open the right cover before you install the PCDU in the machine.
Drum
1. Remove the PCDU ( p.95)
2. Toner cap [A]

3. Insert cap [A] into the opening of the PCDU [B].
• Make sure that the cap is inserted completely into the opening.
96
PCDU
4. Open the PCDU [C] ( x 2).
5. Bracket [D] ( x 1)
97
6. Pull the drum [E] towards the front (the left side in the illustration) while releasing the charge
roller [F] using the release levers [G], and then remove the drum .
• Never touch the drum surface with bare hands.
Re-installation
1. Replace the drum and close the PCDU ( x 2).

2. Put the opening cap [A in the previous procedure] back in its original place.
3. After replacing the drum, do these SPs:
• SP 2001: Charge Bias Setting – make sure that this is at the default setting
• SP 3001-2: P Sensor Initial Setting (P sensor = ID Sensor)
• SP 2805: Process Setting
• SP 2810-1: Grayscale Setting
Pick-off Pawls
1. Drum ( p.96)
2. Pawl assembly [A]

3. Pick-off pawl [B] (spring x 1, spur x 1)
98
PCDU
Pick-off Pawl Position Adjustment
If the pick-off pawl has marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can be adjusted using
either method:
• Changing the spur position
• Changing the pick-off pawl assembly position
Charge Roller and Cleaning Roller
1. Drum ( p.96)
2. Push the charge roller holder [A] toward the front of the drum ( x 2) and remove the spring [B].
3. Charge roller [C].
• Disengage the charge roller on the right side to remove it. Try to avoid touching the charge
roller.
4. Cleaning roller [D]
• Disengage the cleaning roller on the left to remove it.

5. After replacing the charge roller and cleaning roller, check the value of SP2001-001. If it is not at
the standard value (1500), set SP2001-001 to "1500".
• If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the charge roller voltage
will be too high.
99
Drum Cleaning Blade
1. Drum ( p.96)
2. Charge roller and cleaning roller ( p.99)
3. Remove drum cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
Re-installation
Put toner on the edge of cleaning blade and the mylar at the back side of cleaning blade before re-
installing this blade.
ID Sensor
1. PCDU ( p.95)
2. Fusing unit ( p.119)
100
PCDU
3. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

4. ID sensor [B] ( x 1)
• Do SP3-001-002 to initialize the ID sensor after replacing.
101
Development
Development Filter
1. PCDU ( p.95)
2. Open the PCDU. ( p.96 "Drum")
3. Upper development cover [A] ( x2)

4. Development filter [B]
Development Roller
1. PCDU ( p.95)
3. Upper development cover ( p.102 "Development Filter")
102
Development
4. Development roller [A]
• Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
Cleaning Procedure
1. PCDU ( p.95)
2. Remove the two screws [A] and open the PCDU as shown above.
103
3. Remove the upper development cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Fold up a sheet of copy paper [A] to fit the width of the uncovered area of the development roller,
as shown below.
5. Slide the paper [A] along the length of the roller to clean the toner off the surface.
104
Development
6. Rotate the development roller [A] in the direction of the arrow until the section you cleaned is no
longer visible.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have cleaned the entire surface of the roller.
8. Reassemble the PCDU and install the PCDU into the machine.
Developer
1. PCDU ( p.95)
3. Development roller ( p.102)
4. Joint bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

5. Development unit [B]
105
6. Tip out the old developer [C].

7. Turn drive gear [D] to ensure that no developer remains in the unit or on the developer roller.
• Dispose of the used developer in accordance with local regulations. Work carefully to avoid
scratching or nicking the development roller.
8. Clean the development roller with a dry cloth.
9. Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer [E] evenly along the length of the development unit.
10. Rotate the drive gear [F] to work the developer into the unit.
11. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until all toner is in the unit and level with the edges.
12. Re-install the development roller.
• Make sure that the seals at the both sides of the development roller are set inside the case
after you re-install the development roller.
106
Development
13. Place a piece of paper [G] over the toner entrance hole. This prevents used toner falling from the
drum into the development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering with the Vref
setting (toner density reference voltage)
14. Secure the drum [H] to the development unit, to close the PCDU ( x 2).
15. Install the PCDU in the machine and close the front and right doors.
16. Turn on the main power switch, and wait for the machine to warm up.
17. Do SP2801 to initialize the TD sensor and enter the developer lot number.
18. After performing the TD sensor initial setting, remove the sheet of paper from the PCDU.
TD Sensor
1. PCDU ( p.95)
2. Empty all developer from the development unit. ( p.105 "Developer")
107
3. Seal
4. TD sensor [A] ( x1)
• The TD sensor is attached to the casing with double-sided tape [B]. Pry it off with the flat head
of a screwdriver. Use fresh double-sided tape to re-attach the sensor.
5. Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial setting using
SP2-801.
• When performing the TD sensor initial setting, cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of
paper.
108
Transfer
Transfer
Transfer Belt Unit
• To avoid exposing the drum to strong light, cover it with paper if the right cover will be open for a
long period.

2. Release the lever [B].
3. Transfer belt unit [C]
• Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
Transfer Belt
1. Transfer belt unit ( p.109)
109
2. Connector [A] ( x 1)
3. Remove the springs (front and rear) [B].

4. Release the hooks (front and rear) [C].
5. Transfer belt with rollers [D]
110
Transfer
6. Lay the transfer belt with rollers on a flat clean surface, and fold the unit [E] to release the tension
on the belt ( x 2).
7. Transfer belt [F]
• Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.

• Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and shafts with alcohol to prevent
the belt from slipping.
• When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure that the belt is under the pin [F].
• To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation, manually turn the rollers and make
sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the edges of any of the rollers.
111
Toner Overflow Sensor
2. Toner overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade

2. Transfer belt ( p.109)
3. Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
• Avoid touching the edge of the new blade. Check the new blade for dust or damage.
112
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Paper Feed Unit
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1. Right rear cover ( p.83)

2. Duplex unit ( p.134)
3. Pull out tray 1 and tray 2.
4. Paper guide plate [A] (hook x 2)
5. Harness cover [A] ( x 1)
113
6. Paper feed unit [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Pick-Up, Feed and Separation Rollers
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1. Paper feed unit ( p.113)
2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1)

3. Pick-up roller [B]
4. Feed roller [C]
5. Separation roller [D] and torque limiter [E] ( x 1)
114
Paper Feed
Tray Lift Motor
2. Tray lift motor 1 or 2 [A] ( x 2, x 3)
Relay, Tray Lift, Paper End and Paper Feed Sensors
Tray 1 and Tray 2

3. Paper feed unit ( p.113)
115
4. Tray lift sensor [A] ( x 1)

5. Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook, x 1 each)
6. Relay sensor bracket [D] ( x 1)
7. Relay sensor [E] ( x 1, hook)
8. Paper feed sensor bracket [F] ( x 1)
9. Paper feed sensor [G] ( x 1, hook)
Registration Sensor

3. Paper feed unit for tray 1 ( p.113 "Paper Feed Unit")
4. Paper Trays 1 and 2
116
Paper Feed
5. Paper dust box [A]

7. Pull out the paper dust container [B].
8. Remove two screws [C].
• This makes the paper guide [D] tilt a little bit. Now you can access the screw [E].
9. Dust container rail [F] ( [E] x 1)
10. Sensor bracket [G] ( x 1)
117
• You can only access the screw on the sensor bracket from the inside (paper tray location) of
the machine.
11. Registration sensor [H] ( x 1, hooks)
Reinstall the registration sensor
It is very difficult to secure the sensor bracket to the frame. First attach the sensor bracket with tape
temporarily.
118
Fusing
Fusing
Fusing Unit
• Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the
procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.
1. Turn off the main power switch.

2. Open the right door.
3. Pull up the lock levers [A].

4. Pull the fusing unit [B] until you hear a click.
• The lock levers lock the fusing unit again at this time to prevent the fusing unit from falling
down.
5. Pull up the lock levers [A] again, and then remove the fusing unit [B].
Web Roller Unit
119
2. Web roller unit [A] ( x 2)
Brake Pad
1. Web roller unit ( p.119)
2. Web left cover [A] ( x 1, stepped screw x 3)

3. Web top frame [B] ( x 2)
120
Fusing
4. Web left frame [C] ( x 2)

5. Brake pad [D]
Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers

2. Web left cover ( p.120 "Brake Pad")
3. Web top frame ( p.120 "Brake Pad")
4. Web left frame ( p.120 "Brake Pad")
5. Front gear bracket [A] ( x 2)

6. All gears and bushings (rear side) [B] ( x 2)
121
7. Rear gear bracket [C] ( x 2)

8. All gear and bushings (rear side) [D] ( x 2, spring x 1)
9. Front bracket [E] ( x 2)
10. Web holder roller [F] (holder x 2, spring x 2)

11. Web take up roller [G] ( )
12. Web supply roller [H] ( )
122
Fusing
Installing a new web holder roller
The holder [A] has a one-way clutch. Make sure that the holder [A] is set at the front side.
Installing new web rollers
1. Install the web supply roller [A] first ( ). Make sure that the web sheet is under the pin [B].
2. Install the web take up roller [C] ( ). Make sure that the printed number [D] is outside the
web take up roller.
3. Reinstall the rear gear bracket ( p.121 "Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers").
4. Reinstall the front and rear gears and bushings ( p.121 "Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers").
5. Reinstall the rear gear bracket ( p.121 "Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers").
123
6. Turn the rear gear [E] in the arrow direction to remove the slack in the web sheet.
7. Reinstall the front gear bracket [F] ( p.121 "Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers").
8. Turn the coupling [G] in the arrow direction to remove the slack in the web sheet.
9. Reinstall the web unit.
10. If you install a new cleaning web, reset SP 7806-008 (press "Execute" on the LCD).
Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller
2. Fusing exit guide [A] (lock x 2)

3. Fusing front upper cover [B] ( x 3)
4. Fusing rear upper cover [C] ( x 3)
5. Fusing outer guide [D] (front: x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1)
124
Fusing
6. Cleaning roller unit [E] ( x 4)

7. Pressure roller cleaning roller [F] (spring x 2, holder x 2)
Thermostats

3. Fusing top cover [A] (front: x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1)

4. Thermostat holder [B] ( x 2)
125
5. Thermostat cover [C] ( x 2)

6. Thermostat [D] (terminal x 2)
Thermistor

3. Fusing top cover ( p.125 "Thermostats")
4. Pull the two tabs [A].

5. Disconnect the two terminals [B].
6. Sensor stays [C] ( x 1 each)
7. Thermistors [D] ( x 2, x 1)
Hot Roller Strippers

126
Fusing
4. Fusing top frame [A] ( x 5)
• The cords on this frame are still connected to the fusing unit at this time. Be careful not to
damage the cords when removing the hot roller stripper [B].
5. Hot roller stripper [B] (spring x 1)
Fusing Lamps

127
4. Connector cover [A] ( x 2)

5. Fusing top frame with connector [B] ( x 9)
6. Fusing front lower cover [C] ( x 2)

7. Fusing front frame [D] ( x 3)
8. Fusing rear lower cover [E] ( x 2)
9. Fusing rear frame [F] ( x 5)
128
Fusing
10. Terminal bracket [G] ( x 4)

11. Front holder bracket [H] ( x 1)
12. Terminal base [I] ( x 3)
13. Rear holder bracket [J] ( x 1)
14. Fusing lamp-Center (550W) [K]
15. Fusing lamp-End (750W) [L]
Hot Roller and Pressure Roller
1. Fusing lamps-Center and End ( p.127 "Fusing Lamps")
129
2. Hot roller [A] (snap ring x 2, gear x 2, bushing x 2)

3. Pressure roller [B] ( x 2, bushing x 2)
130
Paper Exit
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Unit

2. Fusing exhaust fan duct ( p.166 "Fusing Exhaust Fan")
3. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 3, x 2)
Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, and Paper Exit Sensors
131
1. Paper exit unit ( p.131)

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Paper exit sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
4. Paper overflow sensor [C] ( x 1, hooks)
5. Sensor bracket [D] ( x 2)
6. Fusing exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1)
Junction Jam Sensor

2. Paper guide [A] ( x 3)
3. Junction jam sensor [B] ( x 1)
Paper Exit Motor
132
Paper Exit
2. Motor cover [A] ( x 1)

3. Exit motor [B] ( x 2, x 2, x 1)
133
Duplex
Duplex Unit
2. Open the lower right cover [A] at the duplex unit.

3. Release the tab [B] and remove the lower door (spring x 2).
5. Release the front link [C] ( x 1).
134
Duplex
6. Keep the right door fully open.
7. Push up the duplex unit a little bit, while pressing the bracket [D] to lock the spring [E].
• Do not let the duplex unit open fully before releasing the wire (step 8). Otherwise, the lock for
the spring [E] is released.
135
8. Wire [F] ( x 1)
9. Push the projection [G].
10. Duplex unit ( x 3, x 1, ground cable x 1)
136
Duplex
Right Door Cover
1. Open the duplex door [A] and by-pass tray.
2. Right door cover [A] ( x 4)
Duplex Door Sensor
1. Right door cover ( p.137)
137
2. Duplex door sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
Duplex Entrance Sensor

3. Duplex entrance guide [A] ([B]: x1, [C]: Stepped screw x 2)
138
Duplex
4. Duplex entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
5. Duplex entrance sensor [A] (hooks)
Duplex Exit Sensor
139
2. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3)
3. Remove the shaft [B] ( x 1).

4. Transfer belt unit holder [C] ( x 1, x 1)
• When re-installing the transfer belt unit holder, make sure that the spring [D] correctly hooks
onto the frame.
140
Duplex
5. Guide plate [E] (two hooks)

6. Duplex exit sensor [F] ( x 1, hooks)
Duplex/By-pass Motor

141
3. Frame [A] ( x 4)
4. Duplex/By-pass motor bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
5. Duplex/By-pass motor [C] ( x 4, bushing x 8, timing belt x 1)
Duplex Inverter Motor

3. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3)
142
Duplex
4. Duplex door [B]

5. Duplex guide plate [C] ( x 3)
6. Bracket [D] ( x 2)
7. Duplex inverter motor [E] ( x 3, x 1)
143
By-pass
By-pass Paper Size Sensor/By-pass Paper Length Sensor
1. Open the lower right cover [A].
2. Disconnect the connector and clamp.
144
By-pass
3. Open the by-pass tray [A].
4. Move the side fences to the center.

5. By-pass tray cover [A] ( x 4)
6. By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1)

7. By-pass paper length sensor [B] ( x 1)
145
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor
1. Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered).
2. Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the projection
[C] of the left side fence bar.
4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
5. Check this switch operation with SP5803-024 (By-pass: Paper Size Sensor< Input Check).
- Display on the LCD -
Paper Size Display Paper Size Display
A3 SEF 00001110 A5 SEF 00001011
B4 SEF 00001100 B6 SEF 00000011
A4 SEF 00001101 A6 SEF 00000111
B5 SEF 00001001 Smaller A6 SEF 00001111
By-pass Paper End Sensor
146
By-pass
2. By-pass feed unit cover [A] ( x 2).

3. By-pass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
By-pass Pick-up, Feed and Separation Roller, Torque Limiter

2. By-pass feed unit cover ( p.146 "By-pass Paper End Sensor")
3. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook)

4. By-pass feed roller [B] ( x 1)
147
5. By-pass separation roller [C] ( x 1)

6. Torque limiter [D]
By-pass Feed Clutch

2. Right door rear cover ( p.139 "Duplex Exit Sensor")
4. Transfer belt unit holder ( p.139 "Duplex Exit Sensor")
5. By-pass feed clutch holder [A] ( x 2)

6. By-pass feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1)
148
Drive Area
Drive Area
Paper Feed Clutch
Tray 1 and Tray 2
2. Clutch bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, bushing x 1)

3. Paper feed clutch [B] ( x 1)
Development Paddle Motor
149
2. Development paddle motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
Transfer/Development Motor
2. Transfer/development motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
150
Drive Area
Drum Motor
2. Drum motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
Fusing Motor
151
2. Fusing motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
Web Motor
2. Bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 1)
152
Drive Area
3. Web motor [A] ( x 1)
Paper Feed Motor

3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Transfer Belt Contact Motor

153
3. Transfer belt contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Registration Motor

3. Registration motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1)

4. Registration motor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
Toner Supply Motor
154
Drive Area
2. Upper inner cover ( p.81 "Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover")
3. Output Tray ( p.87)
4. Exhaust duct [A] ( x 2)

5. Toner supply motor [B] (hooks, x 1)
155
Electrical Components
Controller Unit
1. Controller unit [A] ( x 2)
Controller Board
• The battery on the control board can explode if replaced incorrectly.

• Dispose of the old battery in accordance with the instructions.
Before Replacing the Controller Board in the Model without HDD
When you replace the controller board in a machine without a HDD, address book data can be copied
from an old controller board to a new controller board using an SD card.
Copy the address book data to an SD card from the flash ROM on the controller board with
SP5846-051 if possible.
Replacement Procedure
1. Controller unit ( p.156)

2. HDD unit (if it has been installed.)
156
3. Controller right bracket [A] ( x 4)
4. Controller board assembly [A] ( x 4)
5. NVRAM [A]
157
6. Interface rails [B] (hooks each)

7. DIMM-RAM (If it is installed.)
8. Controller board [C]
When Installing the New Controller Board
1. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old controller board.

2. Install it on the new controller board after you replace the controller board.
3. Replace the NVRAM if the NVRAM on the old controller board is defective.
• Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board. Insert the NVRAM in the
NVRAM slot with the “half-moon” pointing [B] to the right side.
• Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP (Mode Data List)" and "Logging Data") before
you replace the NVRAM.
• Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.
• Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board.
• Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old controller board are the same for the new
controller board. Do not change the DIP switches on the controller board in the field.
158
After Installing the Controller Board
1. For a model without a HDD, do SP5846-052 to copy back the address book to the flash ROM on
the controller board from the SD card to which you have already copied the address book data if
possible.
2. If the customer is using the data encryption feature, the encryption key must be restored.
3. Do the touch screen calibration. ( p.174 "Touch Screen Calibration")
4. Turn the main power switch off/on.
Mother Board

2. Controller unit ( p.156)
3. Exhaust fan duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)
159
4. Screw of the top rear cover ( x 1)
5. Controller box [A] ( x 8, x 4, x 3)
160
6. Controller light bracket [A] ( x 2)
7. Controller box right cover [A] ( x 4)
8. Mother board bracket [A] ( x 1, hook x 2)
161
9. Mother board [A] ( x 6)
BCU
1. Controller box ( p.159 "Mother Board")
2. BCU [A] ( x 4, x 4)
162
3. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old board and install it on the new board.
4. Set the DIP switches on the new BCU board to the same settings as the old board.
• Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the NVRAM
slot with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the left side.
When installing the new BCU
1. Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU.

2. Install the NVRAM on the new BCU after you replace the BCU.
4. Turn on the main power switch.
5. Enter the serial number with SP5-811-004.
6. Turn the main power switch off and on.
7. Do the touch screen calibration. ( p.174 "Touch Screen Calibration")
• Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP (Mode Data List)" and "Logging Data") before you
replace the NVRAM.
• Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage
NVRAM data.
163
Bridge Board
2. Bridge board [A] ( x 6, x 7)
IOB
2. IOB [A] ( x 6, x all)
164
PSU
RTB 21
Avoid touching the ares of the
PSU which may be charged.
2. PSU [A] ( x 4, x all)

3. Two clamps [B] (These clamps will be used for the new PSU.)
High Voltage Power Supply

165
3. High voltage power supply board [A] ( x 5, x all)
Fusing Exhaust Fan
2. Fusing exhaust duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)

3. Separate the duct (hooks).
4. Fusing exhaust fan [B]
When installing the fusing exhaust fan
Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine.
Controller Fan
166
2. Fan cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Controller fan [B] ( x 1)
When installing the controller fan
Make sure that the controller fan is installed with its decal facing upward.
SD USB Board
1. Operation panel ( p.84)
2. SD USB board bracket [A] (small x 2, x 2, x 3)
167
3. SD USB board [A] ( x 3)
LCDC Board
1. SD USB Board ( p.167)
2. Operation panel inner bracket [A] (small x 4)
168
3. LCDC bracket [A] (small x 6)
4. LCDC board [A] (small x 4, x 3)
When Installing the New LCDC Board
Do the touch screen calibration after you replace the LCDC board. ( p.174 "Touch Screen
Calibration")
169
Print Adjustments
Overview
Perform these adjustments after replacing any of the following:

• Polygon Mirror Motor
• Paper Side Fence
• Memory All Clear
Printing
1. Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments.
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-1, No. 14) to print the test pattern for the following
procedures.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
1. Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper type and paper feed station, and adjust it
with following SP modes.
170
Print Adjustments
SP No. Specification
Tray: Plain SP1-001-1
Tray: Thick 1 SP1-001-2
Tray: Thick 2 SP1-001-3
By-pass: Plain SP1-001-4

0 ±9.0 mm
By-pass: Thick 1 SP1-001-5
By-pass: Thick 2 SP1-001-6
Duplex: Plain SP1-001-7
Duplex: Thick 1 SP1-001-8
2. Check side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust with the following SP
modes.
By-pass SP1-002-1
Tray 1 SP1-002-2
Tray 2 SP1-002-3
Tray 3 SP1-002-4 0 ±4.0 mm
Tray 4 SP1-002-5
LCT SP1-002-6
Duplex SP1-002-7
Blank Margin
• If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications, adjust the
leading/left side edge blank margin.
171
1. Check the trailing edge [A], right edge [B], leading edge [C] and left edge [D] blank margins, and
adjust them with the following SP modes.
Leading Edge SP2-103-1

3.0 mm [0.0 to 9.0 mm]
Trailing Edge SP2-103-2
Left SP2-103-3
2.0 mm [0.0 to 9.0 mm]
Right SP2-103-4
Duplex: Trailing Edge:

SP2-103-5 1.0 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
L Size: Plain

SP2-103-6 0.8 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
M Size: Plain

SP2-103-7 0.6 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
S Size: Plain
Duplex: Left: Plain SP2-103-8

0.3 mm [0.0 to 1.5 mm]
Duplex: Right: Plain SP2-103-9

SP2-103-10 0.8 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
L Size: Thick

SP2-103-11 0.6 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
M Size: Thick
172
Print Adjustments

SP2-103-12 0.4 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
S Size: Thick
Duplex: Left: Thick SP2-103-13

0.1 mm [0.0 to 1.5 mm]
Duplex: Right: Thick SP2-103-14
• L Size: Paper length is 297.1 mm or more.

• M Size: Paper length is 216.1 to 297 mm
• S Size: Paper length is 216 mm or less.
Main Scan Magnification
1. Use SP2-109-001 no 5 (Grid Vertical Line) to print a single dot pattern.

2. Check magnification, and then SP2-102-001 (Magnification Adjustment Main Scan) to adjust
magnification if required. Specification: ±1%.
Parallelogram Image Adjustment
Do the following procedure if a parallelogram prints while adjusting the printing registration or printing
margin using a trimming area pattern.
The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side registration for each paper tray
station.
Use SP2-109-001 No. 14 (Trimming Area) to determine whether a parallelogram image appears. If the
parallelogram pattern appears, perform the following procedure.
173
1. Laser unit [A]

2. Bracket [B] ( x2)
3. Install adjustment cam [C] (P/N: A2309003).
4. Secure positioning pin [D] (P/N A2309004) with the two screws removed with the bracket [B]. Do
not tighten the screws at this time.
5. To adjust the position of the laser unit [E]
1) Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam. (See the illustration above.)
2) Tighten the adjustment bracket.
3) Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If the results are not satisfactory, repeat steps
5-1) to 5-3).
Touch Screen Calibration
Do the following procedure to calibrate the touch screen after you clear the memory, replace the
operation panel, LCDC board or NVRAM, or if the touch panel detection function is not working
correctly.
• Do not attempt to use items [2] to [5], and [7] on the Self Diagnostic Menu. These items are for
design use only.
1. Turn on the main switch.
174
Print Adjustments
2. Press the “Simple Screen” key 4 times, the “Suspend” key one time, and then the “Simple Screen”
key 4 times to open the Self Diagnostic menu.
3. On the touch panel screen, press “[1] Touch Screen Adjust”.
4. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the mark that appears in the upper left, lower right, lower
left, center, and upper right in turns on the LCD panel.
5. Press “[#] OK”.

6. Press “[6] Touch Screen Test” on the Self Diagnostic menu.
175
7. Touch the nine points circled in red in the illustration above, and make sure that each point (both x
and y) is within +/- 5 dots of the original “+” displayed.
8. When you are finished, press “[#] OK” on the screen.

9. Touch “[#] Exit” on the screen to close the Self Diagnostic menu and save the calibration settings.
176
5. Service Tables
Service Program Mode
• Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates
that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the machine to process the
data.
Service Program Mode Operation
Service Mode Lock/Unlock
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the
machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the
machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set
"Service Mode Lock" to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > [System Settings] > [Administrator Tools] > [Service Mode Lock] > [OFF]
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is
not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1".
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine off and on.
• Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
• The administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
Service Program Mode Tables
Please note these general changes in this section:

• Group 8 (Data Log 2) is a new group of counters.
• Along with the addition of Group 8, many of the Group 7 counters have been removed.
177
5. Service Tables
Service Table Key
Notation What it means
Example: [-9 to +9 / 0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be adjusted in

[range / default / step] the range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM reset, and the
value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key press.
Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value (factory
*
setting) is restored.
DFU Denotes "Design or Factory Use". Do not change this value.
Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
SSP This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode.
178

SP Tables
There are the most commonly used SP codes in the “Service Main SP Tables” and "Engine Main SP
Tables - 1 to - 9" of "Main Chapters".
• Service SP Tables
• Engine SP Tables
179
5. Service Tables
Service Main SP Tables

SP1-xxx
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never
occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the
printable area.
1001 Bit Switch
180
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Collate Normal Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have
a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
• If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL
switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
181
5. Service Tables
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be
changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Increases printing speed but simplex pages may be printed on the back side
of the sheet.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 IPDS support tools 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Enables the port for IPDS support tools.
1001 Bit Switch
182
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch

Disable Enable
Type" buttons on the operation panel.
If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch
bit 0 Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on the device and
configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch 0: Disable

1: Enable
occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this Bit Switch, the device can be configured
to print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering the

0: Disable 1: Enable
contents of a job
If this switch is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print data. This is
achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a module called the "GPS
Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this switch is for troubleshooting the effects of SDK
applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a

job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000 Disable Enable (1000)
jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via
Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 DFU - -
183
5. Service Tables
bit 6 Method for determining the image rotation for the

edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of
older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.

If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex job are
not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems with letterhead/pre-
printed pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.
1001 Bit Switch
006 Bit Switch 6 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable
bit 0 If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last
page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the
duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 3
184
PCL edge to edge printing setting 0: Disable 1: Enable
bit 4 (Standard) (BMS)
Switches the edge to edge printing setting for custom-made machines (BMS).
bit 5
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
"Disabled
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via "Enabled
USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediatel
(10 seconds)"
y)"
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device whether
to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled

Enabled
(Not
(Cancelled)
cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation (SEF/LEF) 0: Disable 1: Enable
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous generations. It only
takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" = "Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the bypass
tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch, the
MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by the MFP
bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
185
5. Service Tables
bit 4 Response to PJL USTATUS when multiple collated

copies are printed
When enabled, if multiple collated copies are printed, the device no longer
responds to PJL USTATUS with the number of pages in the current copy. Instead the
device will return the total number of pages for all copies.
Bit 5 DFU
- -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 List / Test Print Lock 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, you can lock or unlock the [List/Test Print] items under the Pinter Features
menu when the Store and Skip Errored Job Function is on.
Bit 6 Optional charge machines - -
If enabled, you can use the optional charge

machines when the Store and Skip Errored Job 0: Disable 1: Enable
Function is on.
Bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 List / Test Print menu 0: Disable 1: Enable
When enabled, the [Multiple Lists] menu is displayed in [List / Test Print] under the
Printer Features menu.
bit 1 Interrupt printing 0: Job 1: Page
Selects the units for the interrupt printing function.

When you select "0," you can interrupt printing of a job while being processed.
When you select "1," you can interrupt printing of a page while being processed.
186
Bit 2 DFU
- -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 7
1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 001
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 003 Delete Program
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Printer Summary

1004 001
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1005 [Display Version]
Printer Version
1005 002
Displays the version of the printer application.
1007 [Supply Info.]
[0 to 1 / 1 ]
1007 001 0: Displays the info.
1: Does not display the info.
1110 [Media Print Device Setting]
1110 002 0: Disable 1: Enable Selects the setting for the media print device.
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]
187
5. Service Tables
0: Excluding New Job Select whether to include an image

1111 001 processing job in jobs subject to full
1: Including New Job cancellation from the SCS job list.
188
Engine Main SP Tables-1

SP1-xxx: Feed
Leading Edge Registration

1001* Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation
timing.
001 Tray: Plain
002 Tray: Thick 1
003 Tray: Thick 2
004 By-pass: Plain

[–9 to 9/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 By-pass: Thick 1
007 Duplex: Plain
008 Duplex: Thick 1
Side-to-Side Registration
1002* Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for
each mode.
001 By-pass
002 Tray 1
003 Tray 2
004 Tray 3 [–4 to 4/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 Tray 4
006 LCT
007 Duplex
189
5. Service Tables
Registration Buckle Adjustment

1003* Adjusts the paper feed motor timing. Paper feed motor timing determines the amount of
paper buckle at Registration. (A "+" setting causes more buckling.)
001 Tray 1: Plain
002 Tray 1: Thick 1
003 Tray 1: Thick 2

[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
004 Tray 2, 3, 4: Plain
005 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick1
006 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick2
007 By-pass: Plain
008 By-pass: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -2 /1 mm step]
010 Duplex: Plain [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
011 Duplex: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -3 / 1 mm step]
012 LCT: Plain
013 LCT: Thick1 [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
014 LCT: Thick2
By-pass Paper Size Detection

1007*
Controls paper size detection for the by-pass feed table.
001 Detection Timing [-15 to 15 / 0 / 5 mm step]
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 LG Detection
0: LT SEF, 1: LG
190
Fusing Temperature Adjustment
Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at the center and ends of the roller for the
quality or thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this machine has two fusing lamps: one
1105* heats the center of the roller, the other heats both ends. Each fusing lamp can be adjusted
separately.
The "re-load temperature" is the "print ready temperature". When the fusing temperature
exceeds this setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a re-load temperature (Re-
load Temp. = Fusing. Temp – SP Value.) that is higher than the SP1-105-2 setting.
Roller Center [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]

001
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller.
Roller Ends [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]

002
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller.
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Center [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller. This setting depends on the
target temperature.
003 Reload temp. = Target Temp – This SP Setting
• Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 1 (Roller Center:
Trays)
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Ends [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends on the
target temperature.
• Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 2 (Roller Ends:
Trays)
005 to The following SPs adjust the fusing temperature at the center or ends of the hot roller for
022 each paper type.
005 Roller Center: M-Thick [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
006 Roller Ends: M-Thick [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg]
191
5. Service Tables
007 Roller Center: Thick 1

[100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]
008 Roller Ends: Thick 1

[100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
010 Wait Temp: Center Minus
011 Wait Temp: Ends Minus [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
012 Roller Ends: Thin [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
013 Roller Center: OHP: Plain [100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
014 Roller Ends: OHP: Plain

[100 to 170 / 155/ 1 deg]
015 Roller Center: OHP: Thick
016 Roller Ends: OHP: Thick [100 to 170 / 160/ 1 deg]
017 Roller Center: Special 1 [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
018 Roller Ends: Special 1 [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
023 Feed Waiting: Plain Turns the feed waiting mode on or off for each
paper type.
024 Feed Waiting: M-Thick
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025 Feed Waiting: Thick 1 0=Off, 1=On
026 Feed Waiting: Thick 2 The paper waits at the registration roller until
the fusing temperature reaches the prescribed
temperature (adjustable with SP1105-028 to
-37).
027 Feed Waiting: Thin If you enable this feature, also set SP
1105-38 to a convenient value for the
customer.
192
028 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Plain
029 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Plain
030 Feed Wait: Center Minus: M-Thick
031 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: M-Thick
032 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 1 Adjusts the offset value for each re-load
temperature to exit the feed waiting mode.
033 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 1 [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
034 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 2
035 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 2
036 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thin
037 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thin
Sets the maximum feed waiting time.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]
The paper is fed when the time specified with
038 Feed Waiting: Maximum Time this SP has passed even though the fusing
temperature has not reached the prescribed
temperature.
0: Disabled.
1106 Fusing Temperature Display
001 Roller Center Displays the temperature of the fusing unit.
002 Roller Ends [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
003 Machine Inside at Power On Displays the temperature inside the machine.
004 Machine Inside [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
193
5. Service Tables
MotorSpeedAdjust
Adjusts the speeds of each motor. Each step decreases or increases motor speed in
0.05% increments
Regist: Registration motor, Feed: Feed motor,
1801* Duplex: Duplex/By-pass motor, Inverter: Duplex inverter motor,
Exit: Paper exit motor, Bridge: Bridge unit drive motor,
OpcMot: Drum motor, TransferMot: Transfer/Development Motor,
FusingMot: Fusing motor,
DevPuddleMot: Development Paddle motor
001 Regist: 90: Thick 2

[-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.05 %]
003 Regist: 180: Plain
005 Feed: 90: Thick 2

[-2 to 2 / -0.4 / 0.05 %]
007 Feed: 180: Plain

[-2 to 2 / -1 / 0.05 %]
009 Duplex_CW: 90: Thick 2

[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
011 Duplex_CW: 180: Plain

[-4 to 4 / -2.3 / 0.1 %]
013 Duplex_CCW: 90: Thick 2

[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
015 Duplex_CCW: 180: Plain

[-4 to 4 / -0.2 / 0.1 %]
194
017 Inverter_CW: 90: Thick 2
019 Inverter_CW: 180: Plain
021 Inverter_CCW: 90: Thick 2
023 Inverter_CCW: 180: Plain

[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
025 Exit_CW: 90: Thick 2
027 Exit_CW: 180: Plain
029 Bridge: 90: Thick 2
031 Bridge: 180: Plain
195
5. Service Tables
033 OpcMot:90
034 OpcMot:154
035 OpcMot:180
036 OpcMot:230
037 TransferMot:90
038 TransferMot:154
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %]
039 TransferMot:180
040 TransferMot:230
041 FusingMot:90
042 FusingMot:154
043 FusingMot:180
044 FusingMot:230
045 DevPuddleMot [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
1902* Cleaning Web Setting
Web Consumption [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 %]

001
Displays the consumed amount of the web roll.
Web Motor Interval [3 to 130 / 6.7 / 0.1 sec]

002
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation.
Web Motor Time [0.3 to 10 / 4.2 / 0.1 sec]

003
Adjusts the rotation time of the web motor.
EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
Web Near End Setting
004 ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]
Adjusts the threshold for web near end.
Web Motor Interval: Thick 1 [3 to 130 / 11.2 / 0.1 sec]

005
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation (thick 1).
196

006
Paper Interval Time [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
007 Adjusts the threshold for paper feeding. When the time between trailing edge
detection and leading edge detection is within the value of this setting, the machine
determines that the paper is still being fed.
Web Motor Setting: Web End [0 to 60 / 27 / 1 sec]

008
Adjusts the motor rotation time after the web end.
Web Motor Rotation: Power On [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]

009
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the re-load state.
Web Motor Interval: Pre-idle [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]

010
Adjusts the motor waiting time after the fusing motor idling.
Web Motor Rotation: Pre-idle [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]

011
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the fusing idling state.
Tray Lock at Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON

1950*
Not used
197
5. Service Tables

SP2-xxx: Drum
2005* Bias Control
Bias Correction 1 [0.1 to 1 / 0.85 / 0.05 step]
001 Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction.
When the value of VSDP/VSG is greater than this value, the charge roller voltage
increases by 30 V (e.g., from –500 to –530).
002 Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction.
decreases by 30 V (absolute value).
Bias Adjustment 1 [1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 vol]

003
Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction.

004
Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction.

005
Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size.
Erase Margin Adjustment
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.

2103* L Size: 297.1 mm or more (length)
M Size: 216.1 to 297 mm (length)
S Size: 216 mm or less (length)
001 Leading Edge

[0 to 9 / 3 / 0.1mm]
002 Trailing Edge
003 Left
[0 to 9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
004 Right
198
005 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
006 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
007 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
008 Duplex Left: Plain

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
009 Duplex Right: Plain
010 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
011 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
012 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1mm]
013 Duplex Left: Thick

[0 to 1.5 / 0.1 / 0.1mm]
014 Duplex Right: Thick
LD Power (DFU)
2105* Adjusts the LD power for each mode.

Each LD power setting is decided by the process control.
001 Process control

[–50 to 79 / 35 /1 ]
002 Process control
003 Print
[–50 to 79 / 5 /1 ]
004 Print
2109 Test Pattern
[0 to 24 / 0 /1 ]
001 Pattern Selection
Test pattern of the GAVD
199
5. Service Tables
0: None
13: Independent Pattern (4 dot)
1: Vertical Line (1 dot)
14: Trimming Area
15: Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
3: Horizontal Line (1 dot)
16: Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
17: Black Band (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line
18: Black band ( Vertical)
6: Grid Horizontal Line
19: Checker Flag Pattern
7: Grid pattern small
20: Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
8: Grid Pattern Large
21: Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
9: Argyle Pattern Small
22: Two Beam Density Pattern
10: Argyle Pattern Large
23: Full Dot Pattern
11: Independent pattern (1 dot)
24:All white Pattern
[0 to 15 / 15 /1 ]
002 Density Set the density of the test pattern which is output in
SP2109-001. This SP is not used for the Grayscale patterns.
Vref Setting
Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). Change this value after replacing the
development unit with another development unit that contains toner.
[1 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 ]
2220* 1. Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit and the
machine that you are going to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit into
SP2-220.
3. After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220 back to
the original value.
Reverse Interval Drum,Transfer [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheets]
2221* Adjusts the threshold for the reverse rotation of the drum and development/transfer
motors. This helps the drum and transfer belt cleaning operations. This reverse rotation
will interrupt a multiple printing job.
200
TD Sensor Initial Setting Initialization
Performs the TD sensor initial setting and allows the service technician to enter the lot
number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the edge of the developer
2801* package.) This SP mode controls the voltage applied to the TD sensor to make the TD
sensor output about 3.0 V. Press "Execute" to start. After finishing this, the TD sensor
output voltage is displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the machine, changing the TD sensor, or adding
new developer.
Toner Overflow Sensor [0 = OFF, 1= ON]

2960*
Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated.
Grayscale Limit (SSP)
2972* Controls the halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the OPC. The halftone
density is detected by the ID sensor, and the machine adjusts the intensity of the LD
beam according to the upper/lower limit setting.
Upper Limit [0 to 100 / 63 / 1vol ]
Defines the upper limit for grayscale.

001
A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale. If the
image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark areas, reduce this
value to make the borders clearer.
Lower Limit [0 to 100 / 57 / 1vol ]
002 Defines the lower limit for grayscale.
A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the scale.
Grayscale Cycle (SSP) [0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 sheets ]
2973* Set s the halftone operation interval in order to prevent deterioration of the OPC. If the
number of copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or if the door is opened
and closed, charge correction is executed.
2974* Image Density
201
5. Service Tables
Adjustment Mode [1 to 5 / 3 / 1 ]
001 Adjusts image density. Changing this setting adjusts development bias and ID sensor
output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density.
Charge Counter [0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 sheets ]
Set the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before the charge
input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in the polarity of the
2980* carrier.
The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually decrease and
cause lower charge output. Setting the charge output to increase after a specified
number of copies can compensate for this effect.
202

SP3-xxx: Process
3001 P Sensor Setting
Current [0 to 43 / 13 / 0.1 mA ]
001* Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor LED to avoid a service call error after
clearing NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM.
The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2.
Initialization -
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor output for the bare drum (VSG) is
002 adjusted automatically to 4.0 ±0.2 V.
Press "Execute" to start. Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the ID sensor,
replacing the drum, or clearing NVRAM.
3045* Toner End Setting DFU
001 ON/OFF [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=Off, 1=On
3902* New PCU Detection (Not used)
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
ON/OFF Setting
001 0: On, 1: Off
Turns on or off the new unit detection for the transfer belt unit and fusing unit.
203
5. Service Tables

There are no Group 4 SP modes for this machine.
204

SP5-xxx: Mode
5009* Add Display Language Bit SW
Adds language available in user choice. (Only the languages registered in the
machine) The available languages are shown below.
List Num. language List Num. language
1 Japanese 15 Czech
3 US English 16 Finnish
4 French 17 Traditional Chinese
5 German 18 Simplified Chinese
6 Italian 19 Thai
7 Spanish 20 Russian
201,202,2
03,204 8 Dutch 22 Hebrew
9 Norwegian 23 Greek
10 Danish 24 Korean
11 Swedish 25 Catalan
12 Polish 26 Turkish
13 Portuguese 27 Brazilian Portuguese
14 Hungarian
Check the list number of the language to add from the list above.
And then change the bit switch settings of the SP5009-201, -202, -203, or -204 refer
to the table below.
205
5. Service Tables
List Num. Assigned Bit Switch
No.1~8 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-201)
No.9~16 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-202)
No.17~24 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-203)
No.25~32 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-204)
Example: To add US English (No.3 in the list) or Czech (No.15)

Turn Bit 3 of “SP5009-201” 0 to 1 for US English.
Turn Bit 7 of “SP5009-202” 0 to 1 for Czech.
After setting, turn the main power switch off and on to make the setting valid.
0: Europe/Asia (mm)
mm/inch Display Selection
1: North America (inch)
5024*
Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
Paper Display
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.

5047*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
Display IP Address
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.

5055*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Toner Remaining Icon Display Change
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
5061*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not display, 1: Display
206
5083* LED ON-OFF setting at Toner Near End
Turns LED yellow lighting ON and OFF at Toner Near End.

001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5104* A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except from the
bypass tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4
x2 and LT x2 respectively.
5112* Non-Std. Paper Sel.
Non-Standard Paper Selection

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not used, 1: Used
Paper Size Type Selection
Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper.
5131* [0 to 2 / - / 1 step]
0: Japan, 1: North America, 2: Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the archive
files stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result.
Bypass Length Setting
Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5150
0: Off [Default]
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
Paper Size Setting

5181*
Adjusts the paper size for each tray. [0 to 1 / - / 1]
001 Tray 1: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
207
5. Service Tables
002 Tray 1: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
003 Tray 1: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
004 Tray 1: 4 0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
005 Tray 2: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
006 Tray 2: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
007 Tray 2: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
009 Tray 3: 1 (Tandem) 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
010 Tray 3: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
011 Tray 3: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
013 Tray 4: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
014 Tray 4: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
015 Tray 4: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
017 LCT [0 to 2 / - / 1 ] 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF
RK4: Setting (Japan only)
Enable or distance the prevention for RK4 (Accounting device) Disconnection. If the
5186 RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine
automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Paper Exit After Staple End
This SP determines whether the machine can output paper if staples run out.
5199 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF. Paper cannot exit if no staples are available.
1: ON. Paper can exit with no staples.
208
5302* Set Time
Time Difference
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before delivery.
The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440 to 1440 / - / 1 min.]
Japan: +540 (Tokyo)
002 NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
KO: +540 (Korea)
5307 Summer Time
[0 to 1 / 1 (NA/EU), 0 (ASIA) / 1 /step]

Setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
001 Enables or disables the summer time mode.
• Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not
activated even if this SP is set to "1".
209
5. Service Tables
Rule Set (Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit,
so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
003
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March.
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
004
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
User Code Count Clear

5404 Clears the counts of the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of
the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5413 Lockout Setting
Lockout On/Off [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: OFF, 1:ON

001
Turns on or off the account lock for the local address book account.
210
Lockout Threshold [1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
002
Sets the maximum trial times for accessing the address book account.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (Lockout is not cancelled.)
Cancellation On/Off 1: ON (Lockout is cancelled if a user ID and password are
003
correctly entered after the lockout function has been
executed and a specific time has passed.)
Turns on or off the cancellation function of the account lockout.
Cancellation Time [1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min]
004 Sets the interval of the retry for accessing the local address book account after the
lockout function has been executed.
This setting is enabled only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (ON).
5414 Access Mitigation
Mitigation On/Off
Permits or does not permit consecutive access to the machine with the same ID and
password.
001
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (Permitted)
1: ON (Not permitted)
Mitigation Time
002 Sets the prohibiting time for consecutive access to the machine with the same ID and
password.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min]
5415* Password Attack
Permissible Number [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 times]

001 Sets the threshold number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to
gain illegal access to the system.
211
5. Service Tables
Detect Time [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]

002
Sets a detection time to count a password attack.
5416* Access Information
Access User Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]

001 Sets the number of users for the access exclusion and password attack detection
function.
Access Password Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]

002 Sets the number of passwords for the access exclusion and password attack detection
function.
Monitor interval [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]

003
Sets the interval of watching out for user information and passwords.
5417 Access Attack
Access Permissible number [0 to 500 / 100 / 1]

001
Sets a limit on access attempts to prevent password cracking.
Access Detect Time [10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]

002
Sets a detection time to count password cracking.
Productivity Fall Waite [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec]

003 Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive number of
access attempts have been detected.
Attack Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
004 Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down
the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been
detected.
212
User Authentication
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

5420*
• These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
041 Printer Determines whether certification is required before
a user can use the printer application.
051 SDK1
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2 Determines whether certification is required before
a user can use the SDK application.
071 SDK3
Authentication Error Code

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: OFF [Default], 1: ON
001 System Log Disp
Determines whether an error code appears in the system log
after a user authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON [Default]
002 Panel Disp
Determines whether an error code appears on the operation
panel after a user authentication failure occurs.
5501* PM Alarm
PM Alarm Level
Sets the PM alarm level.

001
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
0: No PM alarm
213
5. Service Tables
Original Count Alarm (DFU)
Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not.
002
If this is "1", the PM alarm function is enabled.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Jam Alarm
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step]
5504*
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
Error Alarm
Sets the number of sheets to clear the error alarm counter.

The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm
5505* counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied
sheets (for example, default 5000 (C1b) or 10000 (C1c) sheets). The error alarm
occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / 60 / 100 copies / step]
5508 CC Call
001 Jam Remains Enables/disables initiating a call.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 Continuous Jams
0: Disable
003 Continuous Door Open 1: Enable
Sets the length of time to determine the length of

011 Jam Detection: Time Length an unattended paper jam.
[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute]
214
Sets the number of continuous paper jams

Jam Detection Continuous
012 required to initiate a call.
Count
[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 time]
Sets the length of time the remains opens to

013 Door Open: Time Length determine when to initiate a call.
[3 to 30/ 10 / 1 minute]
SC/Alarm Setting
5515* With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error
occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call
003 Service Parts End Call
004 User Call

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
006 Communication Information Test Call
0: OFF
007 Machine Information Notice
1: ON
008 Alarm Notice
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
Individual PM Part Alarm Call

5516 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call when one of
SP parts reaches its yield.
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not send, 1: [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

001
Send) 0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
5731 Counter Effect (Not used)
215
5. Service Tables
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Change Mk1 Cnt(Paper->Combine)
0:Disable, 1: Enable
5746 BMLinkS (Japan only)
Disables or enables the BMLinkS feature.

001 available [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
Displays the polling interval when the

BMLinsS monitor service monitors the
002 interval:mon machine status.
[10 to 3600 / 60 / 1 sec./step]
Displays the sending feature status of the

BMLinkS log service.
004 available:log
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
Import/Export
5749
Touch “Execute” to export or import the selected preference information.
Target: [System] [Printer] [Fax] [Scanner]

Option: [Unique] [Secret]
001 Export
Crypt config: [Encryption]
[Execute]
Option: [Unique]
Crypt config: [Encryption]
101 Import
Encryption key (if selected)
[Execute]
216
Job Access Log
Changes the capacity of log storage.
5750 SP7-750-001 Job Log Access Log Eco Log
0:OFF (Default) 2000 6000 2000
1:ON 8000 1000 1000
Memory Clear
5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP codes,
print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 19 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy

002 Engine
process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control

003 SCS Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM
update information.
Initializes the image file system.

004 IMH Memory Clr
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored

005 MCS documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer

008 Printer Application
SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails,

and initializes the Job login ID.
010 Web Service
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a
PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP

addresses also), the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin settings,
011 NCS WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
217
5. Service Tables
015 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)

016 MIRS Setting
settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service)

017 CCS
settings.
018 SRM Memory Clr Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
019 LCS Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
021 ECS Initializes ECS (Engine Control Service).
025 websys Initializes websys (Web System).
FreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.

5802*
The correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is not fed.
The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a test.
001 TRAY1:A4LEF -
002 TRAY2:A3 -
003 TRAY2:A4SEF -
Input Check
5803 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches. ( p.296 "Input Check
Table")
Output Check
5804 Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes. ( p.305 "Output
Check Table")
Anti-Condensation Heater
5805 [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0:OFF / 1:ON
218
5810 SC Reset
Resets all level A service call conditions, such as fusing

001 Fusing SC Reset errors. To clear the service call, touch "Execute" on the LCD,
then turn the main power switch off/on.
5811 MachineSerial
002 Display Displays the machine serial number.
004 BCU Inputs the serial number.
5812* Service Tel. No. Setting
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a service call

001 Service
condition occurs.)
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the Counter Report
002 Facsimile
(UP mode).
Inputs the telephone number of the supplier displayed on the user

003 Supply
mode screen.
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be displayed on

004 Operation
the user mode screen.
Allows the inquiry display to be displayed on the user mode screen.

101 DispInquiry 0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
5816 Remote Service
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
001
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
219
5. Service Tables
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
002
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.

003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registration has been completed.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification

1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.

011
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
220
RFU (Remote Firmware Update) Timing
Selects the RFU timing.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.

1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG Error Cause
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
014 0: Normal
1: Fails to reflect the client/server certificate settings by network failure to reboot.

Transitions to 0 on restarting the machine.
RCG–C Registed
This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.

021
0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert. Expire Timing DFU

061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates
with the service center.
221
5. Service Tables
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded
RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server
address. The address is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
063
• The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond the 128
character are ignored.
• This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between
Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up Embedded
064
RC Gate-N.
• This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
• The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
• This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066
• The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the
31st character is ignored.
222
CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW
1
URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
2
successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed
3
update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being
4
sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting
11
is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of
067 12
the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully,
13 and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW
URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW
14
controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the
15
successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
16
failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW
URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but a
17
certification error has been received, and the rescue certification is being
recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being
18
notified of the failure of the certification update.
223
5. Service Tables
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the
certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired.
068
2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT: Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the

previous version of the firmware before the firmware
update execution. If the option to confirm the previous
085 Firm Up User Check
version is selected, a notification is sent to the system
manager and the firmware update is done with the
firmware files from the URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the

086 Firmware Size firmware data files during the firmware update
execution.
087 CERT: Macro Ver. Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification.
088 CERT: PAC Ver. Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces are

displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (*) indicate that
089 CERT: ID2 Code
no @Remote certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".
Displays the common name of the @Remote certification

subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are
090 CERT: Subject displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that
224
Displays serial number for the @Remote certification.

091 CERT: SerialNo.
Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote

092 CERT: Issuer certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes ()
indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the current
093 CERT: Valid Start
@Remote certification is enabled.
Displays the end time of the period for which the current
094 CERT: Valid End
CERT: Encrypt Level
Displays the encryption level for the NRS certificate.

102* [1 or 2 / 1 / – ]
1: Indicates that the certificate encryption level is 512-bit.

Manual Polling
200
Executes the manual polling.
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
201 status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device cannot
communicate with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate cannot be
set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
Allows entry of the request number needed for the

202 Letter Number
Embedded RCG Gate.
Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote

203 Confirm Execute
Gateway.
204 Confirm Result
225
5. Service Tables
Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in answer to the
confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the Gateway.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

8: Other error
9: Registration executing
226
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without

-12002
acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without execution of an

-12003
inquiry and no previous registration.
208 Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited. The

-12005 device has an Embedded RC gate-related
problem.
Operation Error, Incorrect
Setting A confirmation request was made after the
-12006
confirmation had been already completed.
The request number used at registration was

-12007
different from the one used at confirmation.
Update certification failed because mainframe

-12008
was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual

-12009
certification and NVRAM
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.
227
5. Service Tables
Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

-2385
international prefix for the telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
Error Caused by Response -2389 Database out of service

from GW URL
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 RCG device not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate setup.

209 Instl Clear NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after this
setting has been changed.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
5821* Remote Service Address
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication

Gate) destination for call processing at the remote service
002 RCG IP Address center.
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1]
Sets the port number of the RCG (Remote Communication

003 RCG Port center.
[0 to 65535 / 443 / 1]
228
Sets the URL path of the RCG (Remote Communication

004 RCG URL Path center.
[0 to 16 characters / /RCG/services/ /-]
NV-RAM Data Upload
5824 Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card. Push Execute.

Note: When uploading data in this SP mode, the front door must be open.
NV-RAM Data Download

5825 Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After downloading is
completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off and on.
5828 Network Setting
Enables and disables bi-directional communication on

the parallel connection between the machine and a
050 1284 Compatibility (Centro) computer.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
0:Off, 1: On
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode)

for data transfer.
052 ECP (Centro)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Switches the job spooling on and off.

065 Job Spooling [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No spooling, 1: Spooling enabled
This SP determines whether the job interrupted at

power off is resumed at the next power on. This SP
operates only when SP5828-065 is set to "1".
Job Spooling Clear: Start
066 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Time
1: OFF Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: ON Clears spooled job.
229
5. Service Tables
This SP determines whether job spooling is enabled or

disabled for each protocol. This is a 8-bit setting.
Job Spooling (Protocol)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
069 0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT
2 IPP 6 SFTP
3 SMB 7 WSPRND
087 @Remote Protocol Cnt (DFU)
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is

TELNET disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
090
(0:OFF 1:ON) [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Disables or enables the Web operation.

Web
091 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
(0:OFF 1:ON)
This is the IPv6 local address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11) in the format: "Link-
Local address" + "Prefix Length"
Active IPv6 Link Local
145 The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
Address
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. These notations can be
abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses " below this
table.
230
Active IPv6 Stateless Address

147
1

149 These SPs are the IPv6 stateless addresses (1 to 5)
2
referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11) in
Active IPv6 Stateless Address the format:
151
3 "Stateless Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
153 in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
4

155
5
IPv6 Manual Address
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
(802.11) in the format:
156
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses" below this table.
IPv6 Gateway Address
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
158 (802.11). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16
bits each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses" below this
table.
Note: IPV6 Addresses

Ethernet and the Wireless LAN (802.11) reference the IPV6 "Link-Local address + Prefix Length". The
IPV6 address consists of 128 bits divided into 8 blocks of 16 bits:
aaaa:bbbb:cccc:dddd:eeee:ffff:gggg:hhhh:
The prefix length is inserted at the 17th byte (Prefix Range: 0x0 to 0x80). The initial setting is 0x40
(64).
For example, the data: "2001123456789012abcdef012345678940h" is expressed:
"2001:1234:5678:9012:abcd:ef01:2345:6789": prefixlen 64
However, the actual IPV6 address display is abbreviated according to the following rules.
231
5. Service Tables
Rules for Abbreviating IPV6 Addresses

1. The IPV6 address is expressed in hexadecimal delimited by colons (:) with the following
characters:
0123456789abcdefABCDEF
2. A colon is inserted as a delimiter every 4th hexadecimal character.
fe80:0000:0000:0000:0207:40ff:0000:340e
3. The notations can be abbreviated by eliminating zeros where the MSB and digits following the
MSB are zero. The example in "2" above, then, becomes
fe80:0:0:0207:40ff:0:340e
4. Sections where only zeros exist can be abbreviated with double colons (::). This abbreviation
can be done also where succeeding sections contain only zeros (but this can be done only at
one point in the address). The example in "2" and "3" above then becomes:
fe80::207:40ff:0:340e (only the first null sets zero digits are abbreviated as "::")
-or-
fe80:0:0:0:207:40ff::340e (only the last null set before "340e" is abbreviated as "::")
Enable or disables the automatic setting for IPv6

stateless.
161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
1: Enable, 0: Disable
Web Item visible
Displays or does not display the Web system items.

[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
236
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Web shopping link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of
237 the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
232
Web supplies Link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top page and link
238 page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Web Link1 Name

239 This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web system. The
maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
Web Link1 URL

240 his SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web system. The
maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Web Link1 visible
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web system.
241
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
DHCPv6 DUID
Sets DHCPv6 DUID.

249
[0000000000000000000000000000h to
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh / 0000000000000000000000000000h / -]
HDD
5832 Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the execution
ends, cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
233
5. Service Tables
Operation Panel Image Exposure Function

5834
DFU
5840* IEEE 802.11
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth setting
006 varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 11 (NA), 13 (EU), 14 (JPN) / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This
007 bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Transmission speed [0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix 0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix 0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
008 0 x 0F - 36M Fix 0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix 0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 0D - 12M Fix 0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
0 x 0B - 9M Fix 0 x 09 - 22M (reserved)
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
WEP Key Select
Selects the WEP key.

Bit 1 and 0
011
00: Key1, 01: Key2 (Reserved),
10: Key3 (Reserved), 11: Key4(Reserved)
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed.
234
Fragment Thresh
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.

042
[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
11g CTS to Self
Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.

043
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
11g Slot Time
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

044
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
WPA Debug Lvl
Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application.

045
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
Supply Name Setting

5841* Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry button
on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2
013 StapleStd3
014 StapleStd4
5844 USB
235
5. Service Tables
Transfer Rate
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.

001
[0 x 01 or 0 x 04 / 0 x 04 /-]
0 x 01 [Full Speed], 0 x 04 [Auto Change]
Vendor ID
Sets the vendor ID:

002
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] (DFU)
Product ID
003 Sets the product ID.
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999 / 100 / 1] (DFU)
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number

recognized as the BCD.
005 Fixed USB Port
This SP standardizes for common use the model name and serial number for USB PnP
(Plug & Play). It determines whether the driver requires re-installation.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
006 PnP Model Name
This SP sets the model name to be used by the USB PnP when "Function Enable (Level
2) is set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name (SP5844-5).
Default: Laser Printer (up to 20 characters allowed).
007 PnP Serial Number
236
This SP sets the serial number to be used by the USB PnP when "Function Enable (Level
2)
set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name (SP5844-5).
Default: None (up to 12 characters allowed for entry).
• Make sure that this entry is the same as the serial number in use.
• At initialization the serial number generated from the model name is used, not the
setting of this SP code.
• At times other than initialization, the value set for this SP code is used.
008 Mac Supply Level
This SP switches of and on the Mac supply level function.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
100 Notify Unsupport
This SP determines whether an alert message appears on the control panel when a
USB device (unsupported device) that cannot use an A-connector is connected.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Function enable
1: Function disable
• An unsupported device is a device that cannot use the functions of the USB
device. For example, a USB mouse cannot be used even if it connected.
• If the PictBridge option is not mounted, even if a digital camera is connected it
cannot be used because it is an unsupported device.
Delivery Server Setting

5845*
These are delivery server settings.
Delivery Retry Interval
003 [60 to 900 / 300 / 1 /step]
Sets the wait time from the error action to the retry.
237
5. Service Tables
Delivery Retry times
004 [0 to 99 / 3 / 1time(s) /step]
Sets how many times to retry.
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
Rapid Sending Control
022 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error.
5846* UCS Setting
LDAP Search Timeout
010 Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1 to 255 / 60 /1 step]
041 Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic

machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the
new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM
and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be
accessed only by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service
technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes successfully, any
user can access the address book.
238
Addr Book Media
Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.

[0 to 30 / - /1]
043
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1 20: HDD
2: SD Slot 2 30: Nothing
4: USB Flash ROM
Initialize Local Address Book

047 Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine
managed with UCS.
Initialize LDAP Addr Book

049 Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP address
book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize All Addr Book
050 Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by
UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not
deleted.
Backup All Addr Book
051 Copies all directory information to the SD card. Do this SP before replacing the
controller board or HDD. The operation may not succeed if the controller board or
HDD is damaged.
Restore All Addr Book
052 Copies back all directory information from the SD card to the flash ROM or HDD.
Upload the address book from the old flash ROM or HDD with SP5846-51 before
removing it. Do SP5846 52 after installing the new HDD.
Clear Backup Info
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot 2. Deletes only the files
053 uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not remove
the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
239
5. Service Tables
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address
book.
Bit Meaning
0 Checks both upper/lower case characters
1
060
2 Japan Only
4 --- Not Used ---
5 --- Not Used ---
6 --- Not Used ---
7 --- Not Used ---
Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book.
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the
password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.

• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group
password policy to control access to the address book.
Complexity Option 2
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the length of
the password.
063 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

240
Complexity Option 3
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the length of the
password.
064 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Complexity Option 4
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the length of the
password.
065 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Encryption Start
094 Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP server.
[0 to 255 / 1 ] No default
Web Service
5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
5848* has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848-100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
004 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits)
009 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits) Switches access control on and
off.
011 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4 Bits) 0000: OFF, 0001: ON
022 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4 Bits)
241
5. Service Tables
Setting: Log Type: Job 1

210
No information is available at this time.

211
Setting: Log Type: Access

212
Setting: Primary Srv

213
Setting: Secondary Srv

214
Setting: Start Time

215
Setting: Interval Time

216
Setting: Timing
217
Installation Date
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to "Installation

001 Display
Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the

printout for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print [0 to 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
242
When the total number of pages that are made reaches this
value, the current date becomes the 'official' installation date for
003 Total Counter this machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
5856 Remote ROM Update
When set to "1" allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284)
during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is cycled
off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable
002 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
5857 Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature
001 is switched on.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event
002 selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2 to 3 / 2 / 1]
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Save to HDD
005
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
006
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
243
5. Service Tables
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the
009 SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD
Card.
010
Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no
key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data

011
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files
012 generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010
or 011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
Free Space on SD Card

013
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)

014 Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory) onto
an SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)

015 This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number.
Make HDD Debug

016
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
244
Make SD Debug
017
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.
Debug Save When
5858* These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-003 stores one SC specified by number.
Stores SC codes generated by copier engine

001* Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
errors.
Stores SC codes generated by GW controller

002* Controller SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
errors.
003* Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1step]
004* Jam (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores jam errors.
5859* Debug Save Key No.
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that
use common memory on the controller board.
006 Key 6 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860* SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
245
5. Service Tables
SMTP Server Port Number
002 This SP sets the number of the SMTP server port.
[1 to 65535 / 25 / 1]
SMTP Authentication
This setting switches SMTP certification on and off for mail sending.
003
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
SMTP Auth. Encryption
This setting determines whether the password for SMTP certification is encrypted.
006
[0 to 2/ 0 / 1]
0: Automatic, 1: No encryption done, 2: Encryption done
POP before SMTP
This setting determines whether the transmission connects with the POP server first for
certification before it connects to the SMTP server for sending.
007
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: No connection to POP server
1: Connection to POP server
POP to SMTP Waiting Time
This SP sets the amount of time to allow for the connection to the SMTP server after the
008 transmission has connected to the POP server and been certified during the execution
of POP Before SMTP.
[0 to 10000 / 300 / 1 ms]
Mail Receive Protocol
This SP specifies a protocol for the mail reception or switches off receiving.
009
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1]
1: POP3 protocol, 2: IMAP4 protocol, 3: SMTP protocol
POP3/IMAP4 Auth. Encryption
This SP specifies whether password encryption is done for POP3/IMAP4 certification.

013
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Automatic, 1: No encryption done, 2: Encryption done
246
POP3 Server Port Number
014 This SP sets the number of the POP3 server port.
[1 to 65535 / 110 / 1]
IMAP4 Server Port Number
015 This SP sets the number of the IMAP4 server port.
[1 to 65535 / 143 / 1]
SMTP Receive Port Number
016 This SP sets the number of the port that receives SMTP mail.
[1 to 65535 / 25 / 1]
Mail Receive Interval
017 This SP sets the timing for mail received at regular intervals.
[2 to 1440 / 3 / 1 min.]
Mail Keep Setting
This SP setting determines whether received mail is stored on the server.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
019
0: Received mail not stored
1: All received mail stored
2: Stores only mail that generated errors during receiving
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour]
020
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.
The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received
during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

021
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: No, 1: Yes
247
5. Service Tables
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
account after the SMTP server is validated.
022
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Select the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
025 Bit 2: CRAM_MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit 4 to Bit 7: Not Used
• This SP is activated only when SMTP authentication is enabled by UP mode.
S/MIME: MIME Header Setting
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent by S/MIME.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
026
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5869 RAM Disk Setting
Enables or disables the Mail function.

001 Mail Function
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
5870 Common Key Info Writing
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for
001 Writing
@Remote specifications.
003 Initialize Initializes the data area of the common proof for validating.
248
Writing: Writes to flash ROM the common proof (2048-bit) for validating the
004
2048bit device for @Remote specifications.
SD Card Appli. Move

5873 Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see "SD Card
Appli Move" in the chapter "System Maintenance (Main Chapters).
001 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another.
002 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
5878 Option Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite Security

option for the copier. For more, see
001 Data Overwrite Security
"DataOverwriteSecurity Unit" in the chapter
"Installation".
Fixed Phrase Block Erasing

5881
Detects the Fixed phrase.
SD Get Counter
5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The
operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD
card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with the
number of the machine.
001
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
249
5. Service Tables
Personal Information Protect
Selects the protection level for logs.

5888* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
SDK Application Counter

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
5907 information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be
registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the
setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5930 Meter Charge
Display Operation State
001 0: OFF
1: ON
Device Setting
5985 The USB support feature is built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable and
disable the features. In order to use the USB function built into the controller board, this
SP code must be set to "1".
250
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
SP Print Mode
5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
001 All ( Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
251
5. Service Tables

SP6-xxx: Peripherals
Punch Position: Sub Scan

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction. (For D636)
001 2-Hole: DOM (Japan)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU [-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
004 5-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Punch Position: Main Scan

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction. (For D636)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.4 mm]
004 4-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.

6130*
Adjusts the paper buckle at the punch unit for each paper size. (For D636)
252
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.25 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Skew Correction Control

6131*
Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. (For D636)
253
5. Service Tables
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Jogger Fence Fine Adj.
6132* This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the
finisher stapling tray in the Finisher D636. The adjustment is done perpendicular to the
direction of paper feed.
254
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Staple Position Adjustment
Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (D636).

6133* + Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
[-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
Saddle Stitch Position Adj. (Not used)

6134* Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled
and folded in the Booklet Finisher (D637).
255
5. Service Tables
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
003 A4 SEF + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.

- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
Folder Position Adj. (Not used)

6135* This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet
Finisher D637.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
003 A4 SEF + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.

- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
Book Fold Repeat (Not used)
6136* Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher D637.
[2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
256
Entrance Sensor
6139 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. (D588) (
p.296 "Input Check Table")
FIN (EUP) INPUT Check

p.296 "Input Check Table")
FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check

p.305 "Output Check Table")
FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check

p.305 "Output Check Table")
6148 Jogger Fine Adj.
001 A3T
002 B4T
003 A4T
004 A4Y
005 B5Y
Adjusts the jogger location [Horizontal direction]
006 A5Y
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 /mm]
007 DLT-T
*Jogger is optional equipment.
008 LG-T
009 LT-T
010 LT-Y
011 HLT-Y
012 Other
257
5. Service Tables
Max. Pre-Stack Sheet [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheets step]
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149*
• You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick
paper.
6150 Jogger Control
Enables or disables the jogger.

001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable. 1: Enable
258

SP7-xxx: Data Log
7401* Total SC Counter
SC Counter
001 Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred.
This SC counter can be reset by executing SP7807 (SC/Jam Counter Reset).
Total SC Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of service calls that have occurred.
This SC counter cannot be reset by executing SP7807 (SC/Jam Counter Reset).
7403* SC History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
7502* Total Paper Jam
Jam Counter
001 Displays the total number of paper jams.
259
5. Service Tables
Total Jam Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of paper jams.
Total Jams Location
These SPs display the total number of paper jams by location. A "Check-in" (paper late)
7504* error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time. A "Check-
out" ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer
than the prescribed time.
001 At power On
003 Tray 1: On
004 Tray 2: On
005 Tray 3: On
006 Tray 4: On
007 LCT: On
008 Bypass: On
009 Duplex: On
011 Vertical Transport 1: On
013 Bank: Transport Sn 1: On
017 Registration: On
019 Fusing Exit: On
020 Paper Exit: On
021 Bridge Exit On
022 Bridge Transport: On
024 Junction Gate Sensor: On
260
025 Duplex Exit: On
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In)
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out)
051 Vertical Transport 1: Off
053 Bank Transport 1: Off
057 Registration Sensor: Off
058 LCT Feed Sensor: Off
060 Paper Exit: Off
061 Bridge: Exit: Off
062 Bridge: Transport: Off
064 Junction Gate Sensor: Off
065 Duplex Exit: Off
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In)
067 Duplex Entrance: Off (Out)
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN
101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN
102 Finisher Staple: KIN
103 Finisher Exit: KIN
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP
261
5. Service Tables
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP
194 Finisher Staple Exit: EUP
195 Finisher Exit: EUP
198 Finisher Folder: EUP
199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP
202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: EUP
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP
206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP
7506* Jam Count by Paper Size
262
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
7507* Plotter Jam History
263
5. Service Tables
001 Last
Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
002 Latest 1
Sample Display:
003 Latest 2 CODE:007
004 Latest 3 SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
005 Latest 4
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Latest 5
where:
007 Latest 6 CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.
008 Latest 7 SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.

TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7502)
009 Latest 8
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
010 Latest 9
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
ROM No./Firmware Version

7801 This SP code displays the firmware versions of all ROMs in the system, including the
mainframe, the ARDF, and peripheral devices.
PM Counter Display
7803*
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
Paper [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the paper counter (pages)
Page: PCD [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

002
Displays the PCD (Drum and Development unit) counter (pages)
264
Page: Transfer [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

003
Displays the transfer unit counter (pages).
Page: Fuser [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

004
Displays the fusing unit counter (pages).
Rotation: PCD [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

005
Displays the PCD rotation counter (distance).
Rotation: Transfer [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

006
Displays the transfer unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation: Fuser [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

007
Displays the fuser unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation(%): PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]

008
Displays the PCD (%) rotation counter (Distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
009
Displays the transfer unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the fuser unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
011
Displays the web unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
PM Counter Reset
7804 Resets the PM counter.

Touch [Execute] two times > "Completed" > [Exit]
Paper
001
Resets the PM counter of the paper.
PCD
002
Resets the PM counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit except developer).
265
5. Service Tables
Transfer
003
Resets the PM counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser
004
Resets the PM counter of the fuser unit.
Web
005
Reset the PM counter of the web unit.
All Clear
006
Resets all PM counter
SC/Jam Counter Reset
7807 Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press Execute on the touch panel.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7507, SP7508.
Self-Diagnose Result Display
7832 Execute to open the "Self-Diagnostics Result Display" to view details about errors. Use
the keys in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all the information. If no
errors have occurred, you will see the "No Error" message on the screen.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
7853 Replacement Counter
PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
001
Displays the replacement counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit).
Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
002
Displays the replacement counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
003
Displays the replacement counter of the fusing unit.
266
Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
004
Displays the replacement counter of the cleaning web.
7904 Near End Setting
001* PCD Sets the near end timing setting for each maintenance
item.
002* Transfer
[0 to 2/ 1 / 1 /step]
0: Earlier
003* Fuser 1: Normal
2: Later
7906 Prev Counter
Page: PCD [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the counter (pages) of the previous PCD

002
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous transfer unit.

003
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous fusing unit.

004
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous PCD

005
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous transfer unit.

006
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous fusing unit.
Rotation(%):PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

007
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous PCD
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

008
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous transfer unit.
267
5. Service Tables
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

009
Rotation(%):Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous cleaning web.
ROM No
7910 Indicate the ROM number for the machine components.

These SPs are listed in the SMC Report, they are not displayed on the operation panel.
001 System/Copy 159 PCLXL
002 Engine 160 MSIS
003 Lcdc 162 PDF
005 ADF 163 BMLinkS
007 Finisher 165 PJL
009 Bank 166 IPDS
010 LCT 167 MediaPrint:JPEG
018 NetworkSupport 168 MediaPrint:TIFF
019 Bank 2 180 FONT
022 BIOS 181 FONT1
023 HDD Format Option 182 FONT2
100 Language1 183 FONT3
101 Language2 184 FONT4
132 NetWare 185 FONT5
150 RPCS 200 Factory
151 PS 202 NetworkDocBox
152 RPDL 204 Printer
153 R98 210 MIB
268
154 R16 211 Websupport
155 RPGL 213 SDK1
156 R55 214 SDK2
157 RTIFF 215 SDK3
158 PCL
Firmware Version
7911 Indicate the firmware version for the machine components.

These SPs are listed in the SMC Report, but they are not displayed on the operation
panel.
002 Engine 162 PDF
003 Lcdc 163 BMLinkS
018 NetworkSupport 165 PJL
022 BIOS 166 IPDS
023 HDD Format Option 167 MediaPrint:JPEG
100 Language1 168 MediaPrint:TIFF
101 Language2 180 FONT
105 ADF 181 FONT1
107 Finisher 182 FONT2
132 NetWare 183 FONT3
150 RPCS 184 FONT4
151 PS 185 FONT5
152 RPDL 200 Factory
153 R98 202 NetworkDocBox
154 R16 204 Printer
155 RPGL 210 MIB
156 R55 211 Websupport
269
5. Service Tables
157 RTIFF 213 SDK1
158 PCL 214 SDK2
159 PCLXL 215 SDK3
160 MSIS
7950 Replacement Date
PCD
001
Displays the replacement date of the PCD.
Transfer
002
Displays the replacement date of the transfer unit.
Fuser
003
Displays the replacement date of the fusing unit.
Web
004
Displays the replacement date of the web unit.
7951 Remaining Counter
PCD(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

001
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the PCD.
Transfer(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

002
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

003
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the fusing unit.
PCD(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

005
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the PCD.
Transfer(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

006
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the transfer unit.
270
Fuser(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

007
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the fusing unit.
PCD (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

009
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the PCD.
Transfer (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

010
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the transfer unit.
Fuser (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

011
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the fusing unit.
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

013
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the cleaning web.
PM Yield Setting
7952
Sets the each yield of the following.
PCD(Page) [0 to 99999999/ 160000 / 1 sheet]

001
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Pages).
Transfer(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]

002
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Pages).
Fuser(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]

003
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Pages).
PCD(Rotation) [0 to 999999999 / 75500000 / 1 mm]

005
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Rotations).
Transfer(Rotation) [0 to 999999999 / 65420000 / 1 mm]

006
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Rotations).
Fuser(Rotation) [0 to 999999999 / 52950000 / 1 mm]

007
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Rotations).
271
5. Service Tables
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 92 / 1 %]

009
Sets the PM yield (%) of the web unit.
7953 Operation Env Log
T<10 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

001
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: T<10°C
10<=T<=17 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

002
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 10°C<=T<=17°C
17<T<23 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

003
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 17<=T<=23
23<=T<=27 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

004
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 23<=T<=27
27<=T<=32 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

005
32<T [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

006
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 32<T
Env Log Clear

7954
Resets the environment logs (SP7953).
272

SP8-XXX: Data Log2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color
faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others,
can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that
you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F,

T: Total: (Grand Total).
P, etc.).
P: Print application.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in the
example) future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the
small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and
refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
273
5. Service Tables
Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to

DesApl
store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count
up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number
GPC
that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up
11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
274
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
ImgEdt
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines

NRS
remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print
jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and
Palm 2
allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different
formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
PGS count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
R
machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
275
5. Service Tables
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
SMC
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
• All of the Group 8 SPs are able to reset by “SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear”.
These SPs count the number of times each

T:Total Jobs *CTL
8001 application is used to do a job.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Note: The L: counter is the total number of
times the other applications are used to send
8004 P:Total Jobs *CTL
a job to the document server, plus the
number of times a file already on the
document server is used.
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer using
the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is counted
at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
276
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application, over
the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored

806x 1 Sort copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the document
server, the L: counter increments. (See SP8-066-1)
806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine

806x 4 Booklet
is in staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the

8 06x 5 Z-Fold
Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is

806x 6 Punch set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See
SP8-064-6.)
806x 7 Other (Reserved)
806x 8 Inside-Flod Not used
806x 9 Three-In-Fold Not used
806x 10 Three-OUT-Fold Not used
806x 11 Four-Fold Not used
806x 12 KANNON-Fold Not used
806x 13 Perfect-Bind Not used
806x 14 Ring-Bind Not used
277
5. Service Tables
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job,
regardless of which application was used.
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number
of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web Image
Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
807x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
807x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
807x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
807x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
807x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
807x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the
error occurs.
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted.
8381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
by the customer. The counter for the
8384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL application used for storing the pages
increments.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
8387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
with the Store File button from within the
Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
278
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted
as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for
the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following
pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/

back counted as 1 page) used for duplex
8411 Prints/Duplex *CTL printing. Last pages printed only on one side
are not counted.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the printer application.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by Other applications
279
5. Service Tables
842x 1 Simplex> Duplex
842x 4 Simplex Combine
842x 5 Duplex Combine
842x 6 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
842x 7 4 in1 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
842x 12 Booklet
842x 13 Magazine
842x 14 2-in-1 + Booklet
842x 19 2-in-1 + Magazine
• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their
compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
280
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below,
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8434 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with
the print application.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Other applications.
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count

843x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or

843x 2 Series/Book
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were

843x 3 User Stamp
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8441
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications.
281
5. Service Tables
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
844x 1 A3
844x 2 A4
844x 3 A5
844x 4 B4
844x 5 B5
844x 6 DLT
844x 7 LG
844x 8 LT
844x 9 HLT
844x 10 Full Bleed
844x 254 Other (Standard)
844x 255 Other (Custom)
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
8451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Bypass Tray
001 Bypass Tray *CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Tray 1 *CTL Copier
003 Tray 2 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
282
004 Tray 3 *CTL Paper Tray Unit (Option)
005 Tray 4 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
LCT (Option)
006 Tray 5 *CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007 Tray 6 *CTL Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on
8461 feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However,
these counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8464
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
846x 1 Normal
846x 2 Recycled
846x 3 Special
283
5. Service Tables
846x 4 Thick
846x 5 Normal (Back)
846x 6 Thick (Back)
846x 7 OHP
846x 8 Other
PrtPGS/Mag
8471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 < 49% *CTL
002 50% to 99% *CTL
003 100% *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 101% to 200% *CTL
005 201% < *CTL
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also
counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of
100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application.
284
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8511
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8514
8 51x 1 RPCS
8 51x 2 RPDL
8 51x 3 PS3
8 51x 4 R98
8 51x 5 R16
8 51x 6 GL/GL2
8 51x 7 R55
8 51x 8 RTIFF
8 51x 9 PDF
8 51x 10 PCL5e/5c
8 51x 11 PCL XL
8 51x 12 IPDL-C
8 51x 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 51x 14 Other
8 51x 15 IPDS
• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
285
5. Service Tables
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
8 52x 8 Inside Fold Half-Fold (FM2) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 9 Three-IN-Fold Letter Fold-in (FM4) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 10 Three-OUT-Fold Letter Fold-out (FM3) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 11 Four Fold Double Parallel Fold (FM5) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 12 KANNON-Fold Gate Fold (FM6) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 13 Perfect-Bind Perfect Binder
8 52x 14 Ring-Bind Ring Binder
• If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are
still counted.
• The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are
counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by

8531 Staples *CTL the machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8551 T:FIN Books
286
001 Perfect-Bind *CTL

Not used
002 Ring-Bind *CTL
8554 T:FIN Books

Not used
002 Ring-Bind *CTL
8561 T:A Sheet Of Paper
001 Total: Over A3/DLT *CTL
002 Total: Under A3/DLT *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT *CTL
004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT *CTL
8564 P:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8567 O:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter
8581 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
287
5. Service Tables
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
O:Counter
8591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed, and
the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.
001 A3/DLT *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Duplex *CTL
T: Coverage Counter
8601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for each
printing mode.
001 B/W *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
011 B/W Printing Pages *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
P:Coverage Counter
8604
-
001 B/W *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
SDK Apli Counter

8617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK application.
001 SDK-1 *CTL
002 SDK-2 *CTL
003 SDK-3 *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 SDK-4 *CTL
005 SDK-5 *CTL
006 SDK-6 *CTL
Func Use Counter

8621
-
288
001 Function-001 *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
289
5. Service Tables

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
290

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
291
5. Service Tables
Dev Counter
8771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers) for
black and other color toners.
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Toner_Bottle_Info. *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001
through 004 are the same.
001 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles
Toner Remain
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user to
8801 check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better than
other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10% steps).
001 K *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% /step]
Eco Counter
8811
-
001 Eco Total *CTL
004 Duplex *CTL
005 Combine *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008 Duplex (%) *CTL
009 Combine (%) *CTL
010 Paper Cut (%) *CTL
101 Eco Totalr:Last *CTL
104 Duplex:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
105 Combine:Last *CTL
292
108 Duplex (%):Last *CTL
109 Combine (%):Last *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% /step]
110 Paper Cut (%):Last *CTL
Cvr Cnt: 0-10%

8851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is
from 0% to 10%.
011 0 to 2%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021 3 to 4%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
031 5 to 7%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
041 8 to 10%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 11-20%

from 11% to 20%.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 21-30%

from 21% to 30%.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 31%-

31% or higher.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Page/Toner Bottle
8891
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
293
5. Service Tables
Page/Toner_prev1
8901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Page/Toner_prev2
8911
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Cvr Cnt/Total
8921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Coverage (%) Bk *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
011 Coverage /P: Bk *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode. These
SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement
in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while

001 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller

002 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing

003 Energy Save Time
background printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.

004 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing background
printing.
Includes time while machine is performing background

005 Off Mode Time printing. Does not include time machine remains
powered off with the power switches.
294
006 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Total time when paper jams have been staying during

007 PrtJam
printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying during

008 OrgJam
scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
Electricity Status
8961
-
001 Ctrl Standby Time *CTL
002 STR Time *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003 Main Power Off Time *CTL
004 Reading and Printing Time *CTL
005 Printing Time *CTL
006 Reading Time *CTL
007 Eng Waiting Time *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008 Low Power State Time *CTL
009 Silent State Time *CTL
Admin. Counter List

8999
-
001 Total
007 Printer: BW
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012 A3/DLT
013 Duplex
027 Printer: BW(%) [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
295
5. Service Tables

Input Check Table
Copier
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to
a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Input Check
5803 Reading
Description
0 1
001 Tray 1: Paper Size Sensor See the table 1 following this table.
002 Tray 1: Tray Set Sensor Set Not set
003 Tray 1: Paper Lift Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
004 Tray 1: Paper End Sensor No paper Paper remaining
Tray 1:
005
Paper Height Sensor 1
See the table 2 following this table.
Tray 1:
006
296
Tray 2:
011
Tray 2:
012
013 Tray 1: Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
017 LCT: Paper Feed Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
018 Relay Sensor 1 Paper detected No paper detected
020 Relay Sensor 3 No paper detected Paper detected
022 Relay Sensor: LCT No paper detected Paper detected
023 By-pass: Paper End Sensor Not end Paper end
024 By-pass: Paper Size Sensor See the table 3 following this table.
025 Registration Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
026 Fusing Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
027 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
028 Junction Gate Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
029 Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
030 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
031 Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
032 Duplex Unit Open/Close Open Close
033 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
034 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
297
5. Service Tables
035 Bank Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
036 Tray Cover Open/Close Close Open
037 LCT Set Set Not set
038 Bridge Tray: Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
039 Bridge Tray: Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
040 Bridge Tray: Set Detection Set Not set
041 Bridge Tray: Left Guide Open/Close Close Open
Bridge Tray: Right Guide Open/

042 Close Open
Close
043 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor Not HP HP
044 New U. Det: Trans. New Not new
045 New U. Det: Fusing. New Not new
046 Fusing Unit Set Set (Bit1) Not set (Bit1)
047 Toner Overflow Sensor Not full Full
Right or front door is Right or front door is

048 Interlock Detection 1
open. close.

open. close.
055 New U. Det. :PCDU New Not new
057 Cleaning Web End Not end End
058 Punch Switch On Off
065 Bypass Tray Paper Length Detection Paper detected No paper detected
200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor
0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
298
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full 0 0
Nearly full 1 0
Near end 1 1
Almost empty 0 1
Table 2: Paper Size Switch
Switch 1 is used for the tray set detection.

0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 4 3 2
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 0 1
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2 B4 SEF *2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 1 0
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 0 0
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
299
5. Service Tables
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-002
(Tray 1) or -006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-003
(Tray 1) or -007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-001 (Tray 1) or -005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-004 (Tray 1) or -008 (Tray 2)..
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)
Models Bit No.
North America Europe/Asia 3 2 1 0
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 1 0
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 0 0
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 1 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (A5 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 0 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (B5 LEF)
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 1 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 0 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 0 1 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 1 1 1 1
300
• *1: When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is "LEF", it considers that the paper
size is bracketed size.
APS Original Size Detection
Width
Original Size Length Sensor SP4-301
Sensor
display
Metric version Inch version L3 L2 L1 W1 W2
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 00011111
B4 10" x 14" O O O O X 00011110
F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x 13",
or 8" x 13" 8.5" x 14" O O O X X 00011100
SP 5126 controls the
size that is detected
A4 LEF 8.5" x 11" X X X O O 00000011
B5 LEF - X X X O X 00000010
A4 SEF 11" x 8.5" X O O X X 00001100
B5 SEF - X X O X X 00000100
A5 LEF/ SEF 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5"

X X X X X 00000000
x 5.5"
3000-Sheet Finisher (D636)
Reading
6140 Bit Description
0 1
001 Entrance Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
002 Proof Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
003 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
301
5. Service Tables
Reading
0 1
No paper
004 Upper Tray Exit Sensor Paper detected*1
detected*1
005 Staple Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
006 Shift Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
007 Shift Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
008 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
009 Lower Tray Height Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
010 Upper Tray Height Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
011 Upper Tray Full Sensor Not Full Full
012 Stack Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
013 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
014 Feed Out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP
015 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
016 Corner Stapler HP Sensor Not HP HP
017 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor Not HP HP
018 Upper Tray Limit SW Not Limit Limit
019 Door Switch Closed Open
020 Corner Stapler Operation Not HP HP
021 Staple Detection No staple detected Staple detected
022 Staple Dip Detection No staple detected Staple detected
023 Punch Movement HP Sensor Not HP HP
024 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor Not HP HP
025 Paper Position Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
026 Punch Full Sensor Not Full Full
302
Reading
0 1
027 Punch HP Sensor Not HP HP
028 Punch DIP SW 1 See *1
030 Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor Not HP HP
031 Stack Present Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
032 Clamp Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
033 Fold Entrance Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
034 Bottom Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP
035 Fold Cam HP Sensor Not HP HP
036 Fold Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
037 Fold Unit Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
038 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Front No paper detected Paper detected
039 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Rear No paper detected Paper detected
040 Booklet Stapler 1: Operation Not HP HP
041 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Front) No staple detected Staple detected
Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Leading

042 No staple detected Staple detected
Edge)
Booklet Stapler 1: Operation (Rotation/

043 Not HP HP
Rear)
044 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Rear) No staple detected Staple detected

Edge/Rear)
046 Upper Tray Full Sensor: 3000 Not Full Full
047 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Front Not HP HP
048 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Rear Not HP HP
303
5. Service Tables
Reading
0 1
049 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Upper Not HP HP
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type
0 0 Japan
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
Reading
0 1
001 Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
Shift Exit Sensor

002 No paper detected Paper detected
(Lower Tray Exit Sensor)
Staple Entrance Sensor

003 Paper detected No paper detected
(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor)
Staple Moving HP Sensor

004 Not HP HP
(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
005 Not HP HP
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
006 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP
007 Staple Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
Staple Rotation Sensor

008 Not HP HP
(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
304
Reading
0 1
009 Staple Sensor Staple detected No staple detected
010 Staple READY Detection Staple detected No staple detected
Exit Guide Plate HP

011 Not HP HP
(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
012 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper Sensor No output tray Output tray

013
(Stack Height Sensor) detected detected
Tray Lower Sensor

014 Lower limit Not lower limit
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
Proof Full Sensor

015 Not full Full
(Paper Limit Sensor)
Output Check Table
Copier
5804 Output Check
001 Exit Motor: 350
002 Exit Motor: 175
003 Exit Motor: 230

Paper exit motor (Mainframe)
004 Exit Motor: 180
005 Exit Motor: 154
006 Exit Motor: 90
305
5. Service Tables
5804 Output Check
007 Feed Motor: 300
008 Feed Motor: 255
009 Feed Motor: 230
010 Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Mainframe)
011 Feed Motor: 180
012 Feed Motor: 154
013 Feed Motor: 90
014 Bank: Feed Motor: 300

Paper feed motor (Optional paper feed
unit)
021 LCT: Feed Motor: 300
024 LCT: Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Optional LCT)
028 Paper Feed Clutch 1

Paper feed clutch 1/2 (Mainframe)
030 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 3 Paper feed clutch 3/4 (Optional paper
031 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 4 feed unit)
306
5804 Output Check
032 LCT: Paper Feed Clutch Paper feed clutch (Optional LCT)
033 Pick-up Solenoid 1

Pick-up Solenoid 1/2 (Mainframe)
035 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 3 Pick-up Solenoid 3/4 (Optional paper

036 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 4 feed unit)
037 LCT: Pick-up Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (LCT)
038 Tray Lift Motor 1: Up
039 Tray Lift Motor 1: Down

-
042 Paper Tray Lock Solenoid Not used
Tray lock solenoid (Optional paper

043 Bank: Paper Tray Lock Solenoid
feed unit)
044 Registration Motor: 230

-
048 Exit: Junction Gate Solenoid Junction gate 1 solenoid
049 Duplex: Inverter Gate Solenoid Not used
307
5. Service Tables
5804 Output Check
050 Duplex Inverter Motor: Fwd: 230

-
054 Duplex Inverter Motor: Rev: 230
058 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Fwd: 230

-
062 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Rev: 230
066 By-pass Feed Clutch -
067 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid -
068 Bridge Tray: Drive Motor: 230

Drive motor (Bridge unit)
072 Bridge Tray: Junction Gate Solenoid Junction Gate Solenoid (Bridge unit)
073 Bridge Tray: Drive Motor: Reset -
074 Bridge Tray: Drive Motor: Enable -
308
5804 Output Check
075 Bridge: Cooling Fan Motor Not used
076 Transfer Belt Contact Motor -
077 OPC Motor: 230
078 OPC Motor: 180

Drum motor
079 OPC Motor: 154
080 OPC Motor: 90
081 Transfer/Development Motor: 230

-
085 Fusing Motor: 230

-
089 Development Puddle Motor -
090 PTL Control -
091 Fusing Fan Motor: High

Fusing exhaust fan motor
092 Fusing Fan Motor: Low
093 Exhaust Fan Motor: High

Exhaust fan motor
094 Exhaust Fan Motor: Low
095 Duct Fan Motor Cooling fan motor
096 Exit Fan Motor: High

Paper exit cooling fan motor
097 Exit Fan Motor: Low
098 PSU Fan Motor -
309
5. Service Tables
5804 Output Check
100 Polygon Motor: 230

-
104 LD 1
-
105 LD 2
106 Toner Bottle Motor: Fwd Toner supply motor
107 Quenching Lamp -
108 Charge Bias -
109 Development Bias -
110 Transfer Belt Voltage -
111 ID Sensor LED -
112 Attention light: Buzzer -
113 Attention light: Blue lamp -
114 Attention light: Red lamp -
115 Cleaning Web Motor Web motor
117 CTL Cooling FAN Controller fan
Output Check
6144
Display Description
001 Upper Relay Motor Upper Transport Motor
002 Lower Relay Motor Lower Transport Motor
003 Exit Motor -
310
004 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
005 Lower Tray Lift Motor -
006 Jogger Fence Motor -
007 Stapler Motor -
008 Stapler Hammer -
009 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid -
010 Positioning Roller Solenoid -
011 Stack Feed-out Motor -
012 Shift Motor -
013 Exit Guide Plate Motor -
Output
6145
Display Description
001 Entrance Motor -
002 Upper Transport Motor -
003 Lower Transport Motor -
004 Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor -
005 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor -
006 Shift Roller Motor -
008 Upper Tray Lift Motor -
009 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor -
011 Feed Out Belt Motor -
311
5. Service Tables
012 Corner Stapler Movement Motor -
013 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor -
014 Corner Stapler -
015 Proof Junction Gate Solenoid -
016 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid -
017 Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid -
019 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid -
020 Stack Junction Gate Motor -
021 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor -
022 Booklet Stapler: Front -
023 Booklet Stapler: Rear -
024 Fold Plate Motor -
025 Fold Roller Motor -
026 Positioning Roller Motor -
027 Punch Drive Motor -
028 Punch Movement Motor -
029 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor -
030 Exit Jogger Motor: Front -
031 Exit Jogger Motor: Rear -
032 Exit Jogger Motor Release Motor -
312
Updating the Firmware

To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded
onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot) on the
controller box.
Before You Begin
An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD cards:
• Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card into the slot
with the power on.
• Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
• Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
• Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high humidity,
or exposure to direct sunlight.
• Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD card get
exposed to shock or vibration.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an application
to it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware
upgrade.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
• "Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card. "Download" means to send data
from the SD card to the machine.
• To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the LCD.
• Disconnect the Ethernet interface cable, Gigabit Ethernet cable, IEEE1284 interface cable and
remove the Wireless LAN interface board before you start the firmware update procedure. Make
sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while the
firmware update is in progress.
Updating Firmware
Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "M132" folder onto the card.
313
5. Service Tables
Updating Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A]. Make sure the label on the SD card faces
the rear side of the machine.
4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure the SD
card locks in place.
• To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops out of the slot.
5. Disconnect the network cable from the machine if the machine is connected to a network.
6. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version update screen
appears on the LCD in English.
7. On the screen, touch the button on the operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want
to update.
314
ROM/NEW What it means
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version currently
ROM: installed. The first line is the module number, the second line the version
name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The
NEW:
first line is the module number, the second line the version name.
• Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time. It is
recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
8. Touch "UpDate (#)" to start the update.
• While downloading is in progress, the LCD will display "Loading". When downloading has
been completed, the panel will display "update done".
• For operation panel software, the Data In indicator flashes red while downloading is in
progress, and then the Check Status indicator flashes green after downloading is completed.
9. The "Update done." message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating. The
message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated.
10. Switch the main power switch off when you see the "Update done" message or follow the
procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the main power switch on for normal operation.
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error "E24" displayed.
For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( "Handling Firmware Update Errors" in this section)
Firmware Update Error
If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update because the
module selected for update was not on the SD card.
315
5. Service Tables
Recovery after Power Loss
If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating,
then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again.
If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct
operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is updated
successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download
automatically from the card without the menu display.
Handling Firmware Update Errors
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code consists of
the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a

20 Cannot map logical address
different SD card.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD.
Cannot decompress compressed Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

22
data damaged.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program defective. If the second attempt
23
update program started fails, replace controller board.
316
Code Meaning Solution
Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly, or use a

24 SD card access error
different SD card.
No HDD available for stamp

30 HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD.
data download
Data incorrect for continuous Insert the SD card with the remaining data required for
31
download the download, the re-start the procedure.
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended

Data incorrect after download
32 module download, then repeat the installation
interrupted
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

33 Incorrect SD card version
corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct data
34
module is not on the SD card) (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is

Module mismatch – Module on
35 for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
SD card is not for this machine
install again.

Cannot write module – Cause
other than E34, E35
install again.
Replace the update data for the module on the SD card

40 Engine module download failed
and try again, or replace the BCU board.
Operation panel module Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
42
download failed and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
43
failed and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Controller module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
44
failed and tray again, or replace controller board.

Electronic confirmation check
failed
install again.
317
5. Service Tables
Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data

The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card.
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824)
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A].

5. Execute SP5-824.
6. Press the "EXECUTE" button to start uploading the NVRAM data.
318
Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825)
The following data are not downloaded from the SD card:

• Total counter
• Duplex, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple counters (system settings).
1. Turn off the main switch.
3. Plug the SD card into SD card slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A].

5. Execute SP5-825.
6. Press the "EXECUTE" button to start downloading the NVRAM data.
Note that the following errors could occur during downloading:
• If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that downloading cannot proceed,
you cannot execute downloading, even by pressing the "EXECUTE" button.
319
5. Service Tables
• If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you press the
"EXECUTE" button a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the card is
abnormal and the execution will halt.
320
Self-Diagnostic Mode
Self-Diagnostic Mode at Power On
As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial settings of the printer
engine to take effect and then starts an independent self-diagnostic test program. The self-diagnostic test
follows the path of the flow chart shown below and checks the CPU, memory, HDD, and so on. An SC
code is displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program detects any malfunction or abnormal
condition.
321
5. Service Tables
Self-Diagnostic Test Flow
322
Detailed Self-Diagnostic Mode
Do not use the detailed self-diagnostic mode in this model.

This mode is only for factory use to test other components or conditions that are not tested during self-
diagnosis after power on.
If you entered the self-diagnostic mode by accident, turn the main power switch off and on.
323
5. Service Tables
Using the Debug Log

Overview
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve
error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but this information is lost
when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
• Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later retrieval.
• Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure below to set up the
machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD. Then ask the user to reproduce the
problem.
Switching On And Setting Up Save Debug Log
The debug information cannot be saved until the "Save Debug Log" function has been switched on and
a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode.
3. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, press “1 On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)”.
4. Press “10Key” to open the number entry screen.
324
Using the Debug Log
5. Enter “1” then press “OK”. This switches the Save Debug Log feature on.
• The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the debug
information to be saved.
6. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857 Save
Debug Log", press “2 Target (2:HDD 3:SD)”.
7. Press “10Key” to open the number entry screen.
8. Enter “2” to select the hard disk as the target destination, and then press “OK”.
• Enter "3” to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is inserted in Slot 2 (Lower
Slot).
325
5. Service Tables
9. Now touch "5858" and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858
(Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
1 Engine SC Error Saves data when an engine-related SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related SC Code is

2 Controller SC Error
generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering
3 Any SC Error
code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
• More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s) and press “10Key”. On the number entry screen, enter "1", and
then press “OK”. Do the same settings for each selection. This example shows "Engine SC Error"
selected.
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch "3 Any SC Error" and press “10Key”. On the number entry screen, enter the 3-digit SC code
number, and then press “OK”. This example shows an entry for SC670.
326
Using the Debug Log
• For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section "6.
Troubleshooting"
10. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Touch
"5859".
Under "5859" press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record. Press
“10Key” to open the number entry screen.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press “OK”.
• Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows "Key 1" with "2222" entered.
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses indicate
the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
Key No. Printer Web
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4400 (GPS) 5682 (NFA)
7 4500 (PDL) 6600 (WebDB)
327
5. Service Tables
Key No. Printer Web
8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3300 (PTS)
9 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)
• The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero ("0").
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print Module PTS Print Server
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource

Management
NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box

(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the SD card or HDD (the
target selected with SP5-857-002) for the events that you selected SP5-858 and the memory modules
selected with SP5-859.
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
• The initial settings are all zero.
• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings, especially
the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key.
• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding 4-digit
numbers from the table.
• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4 MB.
328
Using the Debug Log
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD
1. Insert the SD card into Slot 2 (Lower Slot).

2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB) to write the
debugging data to the SD card.
• The SD card can hold up to 4MB of data. If the debugging data is larger than 4MB, you can
switch to another SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by
email, or just send the SD card by mail.
329
5. Service Tables
SMC List Card Save Function

Overview
SMC List Card Save
The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD-card
inserted into the operation panel SD-card slot.
Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.

2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD-card slot. Then turn the power ON.
3. Enter SP mode.
5. Select SP-5992 "SP Text Mode”.

6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP-5992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
330
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
024 SDK/J Summary
026 Printer SP
7. Press “EXECUTE”.
8. Press “EXECUTE” again to start. Press “CANCEL” to cancel the saving.

9. ”It is executing it.” is shown on the screen while executing.
10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.
• The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

• Press “CANCEL” to abort executing.
331
5. Service Tables
11. Press “Exit” to exit from SP mode.
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists
The SMC list data saved on the SD-card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
follows.
Example:
• [A]: Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)

• [B]:SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP number(s).
In this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the upper SP
table for the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
• [C]: File creation date
Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
• [D]: File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
• [E]: File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
• A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this function is
executed.
332
• This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation panel SD
card slot.
Error Messages
SMC List Card Save error message:

• Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
333
5. Service Tables
334
6. Troubleshooting
Service Call Conditions

Summary
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
To prevent damage to the machine, the main machine Enter SP mode, use SP 5810,
A cannot be operated until the SC has been reset by a touch [Execute], and then turn the
service representative (see the note below). main power switch off and on.
SCs that disable only the features that use the defective
item. Although these SCs are not shown to the user under Turn the operation switch or main
B
normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation switch off and on.
panel only when the defective feature is selected.
The SC history is updated. The machine can be operated The SC will not be displayed.
C
as usual. Only the SC history is updated.
Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs displayed Turn the operation switch off and
D on the operation panel. These are re-displayed if the on.
error occurs again. Also see below.
When a Level "D" SC code occurs

When a Level D SC occurs, a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the operator:
• An error occurred
• The job in progress will be erased
• The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch "Reset" on the screen to reset the
machine immediately and go back to the Home screen.
If the operator does not touch "Reset"
The next message tells the operator that the machine will reset automatically and that the previous job
was lost and must be started again. After reading the message, the operator touches "Confirm" on the
screen. The next screen shows the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the operator turns the
machine off and on.
If the operator touches "Reset"
335
6. Troubleshooting
If the operator touches "Reset" to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to reboot, the machine
reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the Home screen.
• Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.

• If the Remote Service System is in use, the SC code is sent immediately to the Service Center.
SC Code Descriptions
• If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors and then test the
machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the problem. Always do this before
you decide to replace the PCB.
• If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to replace the motor or
sensors.
• When a Level "A" or "B" SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display the SC
number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP mode.
• The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level "D" SC code. This is done for
Level "D" SC codes only.
SC Tables: SC1xx
Serial Number Mismatch
Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code.
195 D
• EEPROM defective
• BCU replaced without original EEPROM
SC Tables: SC2xx
Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout

202 D The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within 10 sec.
after turning on or changing speed
Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout

203 D The polygon mirror motor does not leave the READY status within 3 sec. after the
polygon motor switched off.
336
Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error
The SCRDY_N signal remains HIGH for 200 ms while the LD unit is firing.
204 D • Polygon motor/driver board harness loose or broken

• Polygon motor/driver board defective
• Laser optics unit defective
• Bridge board defective
Laser synchronizing detection error: start position LD0
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is not output for
two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally
220 D • Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective
connection
• Defective laser synchronizing detector
• Defective LD board
• Defective BCU
Laser synchronizing detection error: start position LD1
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is not output for
two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally.
221 D • Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective
connection
• Defective laser synchronizing detector
• Defective LD board
• Defective BCU
FGATE ON error
230 D The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time. (The bridge board
generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration sensor
switches on.)
337
6. Troubleshooting
FGATE OFF error
The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time. (The bridge board
generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration sensor
231 D switches on.)
• BCU, Controller board harness loose or broken

• Controller board defective
• BCU defective
LD error
The bridge board detected a problem at the LD unit.

240 C
• Worn-out LD
• Disconnected or broken harness of the LD.
GAVD communication error
• The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization.

• A device-status error occurs during I2C bus communication.
• The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other than a buffer
270 D shortage.
• BCU, Bridge board harness loose or broken

• Defective bridge board
• Defective BCU
• Defective LD controller board
SC Tables: SC3xx
Charge roller bias leak
A charge roller bias leak signal was detected.

302 D
• Charge roller damaged
• High voltage supply board defective
• PCDU harness defective or disconnected
338
Charge roller bias correction leak
The charge roller bias correction is performed twice even if the maximum charge roller
bias (-2000V) is applied to the roller.
304 D
• ID sensor defective
• Worn charge roller
• Charge roller damaged
Development roller bias leak
The development roller bias leak is detected for 60 ms after the high voltage has been
supplied to the development unit.
320 D • Development bias leak
• Broken harness
• Defective high voltage power supply, voltage supply
• Defective high voltage supply unit
Development paddle motor error
The machine detects a lock signal error from the development puddle motor for 2
seconds after the drum motor has turned on.
324 D • Overload on the development puddle motor
• Defective development puddle motor
• Defective harness
• Defective IOB
339
6. Troubleshooting
ID sensor pattern test error
One of the following readings occurred 10 times in the ID sensor output when the ID
sensor pattern was checked:
1) Vsp > 2.5V
2) Vsg < 2.5V
3) Vsp =0V
350 D
4) Vsg = 0V
• ID sensor connector defective

• Poor ID sensor connector connection
• I/O board (IOB) defective
• Poor writing of ID sensor pattern on the drum
ID sensor Vsg test error
When the ID sensor was checked, the ID sensor output voltage is 5.0V while the LED
current value is 0.
• ID sensor defective or dirty

351 D • ID sensor connector defective
• Poor ID sensor connection
• Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum
Grayscale measurement error
When the grayscale control result is the maximum and it does not operate correctly and
these cases are detected 15 times.
355 C
• ID sensor defective or dirty
• The life of ID sensor or photo conductor
• Shield glass dirty
340
TD sensor (Vt) error 1
The following condition occurs thirty times consecutively during printing. Vt is less than
0.5V or 4.8V or more
360 D
• TD sensor disconnected
• Harness between TD sensor and PCDU defective
• Defective TD sensor.
TD sensor adjustment error
Vts is less than 1.8V or 4.8V or more during TD sensor initialization.
372 D • Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack

• TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective
• TD sensor defective
• Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective
Drum motor error
The machine detects a lock signal error from the drum motor for 2 seconds after the
drum motor turned on.
396 D • Overload on the motor
• Defective drum motor
• Defective IOB
SC Tables: SC4xx
Vsg adjustment error
Vsg is more than 4.2V or 3.8V or less when the machine adjusts Vsg value.
400 D
• Dirty or defective ID sensor
• Defective ID sensor shutter
341
6. Troubleshooting
Transfer belt bias error
The feed back bias from the transfer belt is more than 4V for 60 msec while the transfer
belt bias is output.
The A/D conversion level is 20 or less for 60 msec.
440 D
The PWM duty is 24% or more for 60 msec.
• Power pack broken

• Disconnected connector
Transfer/Development motor error
The machine detects a lock signal error from the transfer/development motor for a
continuous 20 times after the transfer/development motor turned on.
441 D • Overload on the motor
• Defective transfer/development motor
• Defective IOB
Transfer belt contact motor error
The transfer belt HP sensor detects incorrect movement of the transfer belt after the
transfer belt contact motor has turned on.
• Dirty transfer belt HP sensor

442 D
• Defective transfer belt contact motor
• Disconnected connector of the transfer belt HP sensor or motor
• Disconnected cable
• Defective IOB
342
SC Tables: SC5xx
1st tray lift malfunction
The tray lift sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10 seconds. If
the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height, the
paper height position is detected again. At this time, the tray lift sensor should de-
activate within 1.5 sec after the paper bottom plate starts to drop. If it does not
deactivate within 1.5 sec., a message will prompt the user to reset Tray 1. After two
attempts to release the error by re-setting the paper tray, if this does not solve the
501 B problem then this SC is displayed.
• An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the motor drive
and caused an overload.
• Tray lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
• Tray lift sensor defective
• Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
• Tray lift motor defective
2nd tray lift malfunction
The tray lift sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10 seconds. If
the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height, the
paper height position is detected again. At this time, the tray lift sensor should de-
activate within 1.5 sec. after the paper bottom plate starts to drop. If it does not
deactivate within 1.5 sec., a message will prompt the user to reset Tray 2. After two
attempts to re-set the paper tray, if this does not solve the problem then this SC is
502 B displayed.
• An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the motor drive
and caused an overload.
• Tray lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
• Tray lift sensor defective
• Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
• Tray lift motor defective
343
6. Troubleshooting
3rd tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit or LCT)
For the paper feed unit:

• The lift sensor does not turn on within 15 seconds after the tray lift motor has turned
on.
• When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec. If this
condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
For the LCT:
• The lift sensor does not turn on or turn off within 8 seconds after the tray lift motor
has turned on to lift or lower the tray.
• When the main switch is turned on or when the LCT is set, if the end fence is not in
its position (home position sensor ON), the tray lift motor stops. If this condition
occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
• If the upper limit does not go off for 1.5 seconds even the tray lift motor turns on to
lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at power on. If this condition
503 B
• The paper is detected in the left tray even the end fence is not its position (home
position sensor OFF) after the left tray set switch is on at power on. If this condition

• Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection
• Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection
For the LCT:
• Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
• Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
• Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection
• Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection
• Defective pick-up solenoid or connector disconnection
• Left tray set switch or connector disconnection
344
4th tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit or LCT)
For the two-tray paper feed unit:

• When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 15
seconds. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
• When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
For the LCT:
• After the job is finished, if the end fence is not in the home position (home position
sensor ON), the tray lift motor stops.
• When the main switch is turned on or when the paper feed unit is set, if the end
fence is not in the home position (home position sensor ON), the tray lift motor
504 B stops. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
• If the upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray lift motor
is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
• When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.

For the LCT:
345
6. Troubleshooting
5th tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit or LCT)
For the two-tray paper feed unit:

• If the upper limit of the two-tray paper feed unit is not detected within 15 seconds
when the tray lift motor is turned on to lift up the tray.
• When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec. If this
condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
For the LCT:
505 B
• If the upper limit of the LCT 1200-sheet is not detected within 8 seconds when the
tray lift motor is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
• The tray lift sensor of the LCT 1200-sheet does not go off within 1.5 seconds when
the tray lowers. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected

• Upper limit sensor defective or disconnected
Fusing exhaust fan motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on the fusing
exhaust fan.
530 D
• Defective fusing exhaust fan motor or connector disconnection
• Defective IOB
• Disconnected harness
Exhaust fan motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on the exhaust fan
motor.
531 D
• Defective exhaust fan motor or connector disconnection.
• Defective IOB
346
Cooling fan motor error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on
the cooling fan motor.
532 D
• Defective cooling fan motor or connector disconnection.
• Defective IOB
Paper exit cooling fan motor error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on
the paper exit cooling fan motor.
533 D
• Defective paper exit cooling fan motor or connector disconnection.
• Defective IOB
Fusing motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 2 seconds after turning on the fusing motor.
540 D • Motor overload

• Defective fusing motor or connector disconnection.
• Defective IOB
Fusing thermistor open (center)
The thermistor (center) detects 0°C or less for 16 sec. in a row.

541 A
• Fusing thermistor disconnected
• Fusing thermistor connector defective
347
6. Troubleshooting
Fusing temperature warm-up error(center)
This SC is generated if the following condition occurs:

• The thermistor (center) does not detect an 8°C increment in the fusing temperature
for 1.5 sec. just after the fusing temperature reached 45°C.
• The temperature of the center thermistor does not reach 60°C for 7 seconds after
542 A
the fusing lamps turned on.
• The temperature of the center thermistor does not reach the target temperature for
26 seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
• Thermistor warped or broken

• Input voltage is unwarranted
Fusing overheat error 1 (software detection)
A fusing temperature (at the center) of over 230°C (446°F) is detected for 1 second by
the fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing roller.
543 A • Power supply unit defective
• BCU defective
• TRIAC short on PSU (PSU defective)
Fusing overheat error 1 (hardware detection)
A fusing temperature (at the center) over 250°C is detected by the fusing temperature
monitor circuit in the BCU board.
544 A
• BCU defective
• TRIAC short on bridge board (bridge board defective)
Fusing lamp consecutive full power 1
After warm-up the fusing lamp remains at full power for 10 seconds without the hot
roller rotating.
545 A
• Thermistors (center) warped
• Disconnected or defective thermistors (center)
• Defective fusing lamp
348
Zero cross error
• The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off
when turning on the main power.
• The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay is
on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
547 D
• The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal detections.
This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is less than 45.
• Defective fusing lamp relay

• Defective fusing lamp relay circuit
• Unstable power supply
Fusing thermistor open (end)
The thermistor (end) detects 0°C or less for 16 sec.

551 A
• Fusing thermistor (end) disconnected
• Fusing thermistor (end) connector defective
Fusing temperature warm-up error (end)
This SC is generated if the following condition occurs:

• The thermistor (end) does not detect an 8°C increment in the fusing temperature for
1.5 sec. just after the fusing temperature reached 45°C.
• The temperature of the center thermistor does not reach 60°C for 7 seconds after
552 A
the fusing lamps turned on.
• The temperature of the end thermistor does not reach the target temperature for 26
seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
• Thermistor warped or broken

• Input voltage is unwarranted
349
6. Troubleshooting
Fusing overheat error 2 (software detection)
A fusing temperature (at the end) of over 230°C (446°F) is detected for 1 second by
the fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing roller.
553 A • Power supply unit defective
• BCU defective
Fusing overheat error 2 (hardware detection)
A fusing temperature (at the end) over 250°C is detected by the fusing temperature
monitor circuit in the BCU board.
554 A
• BCU defective
Fusing lamp consecutive full power 2
After warm-up, the fusing lamp remains at full power for 10 seconds without the hot
roller rotating.
555 A
• Thermistor (ends) warped
• Disconnected or defective thermistors (ends)
• Defective fusing lamp
Zero cross frequency error
When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more in 11
557 C
detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557 occurs.
• Noise (High frequency)
350
Fusing unit jam
The fusing sensor detected a fusing unit paper late jam three times. The paper was late
and the fusing exit sensor could not detect the paper three times.
559 A
• Remove the paper that is stopped in the fusing unit.
• Check that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper feed path.
• If the error persists, replace the fusing unit.
• SC559 does not operate until SP1159 has been set to "1" (ON). This sets the machine to count the
number of occurrences of paper late jams in the fusing unit. The default setting is "0" (OFF).
• SC559 is issued after the third occurrence of a paper late jam in the fusing unit. Once this SC has
been issued, the machine cannot be used until the service technician removes the cause of the jam
and restores it to normal operation.
• The jam counter is reset after a sheet of paper successfully passes the fusing exit sensor after the
cause of the jam has been removed.
SC Tables: SC6xx
Mechanical counter error: BK
This SC is only for NA models.

610 D The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001 is set to "1".
• Disconnected mechanical counter

• Defective mechanical counter
Communication timeout error between IOB and finisher or mailbox
• The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the finisher or the
mailbox only just after the main switch is turned on.
621 D • The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by URAT.
• Defective main control board of the peripheral

• Defective BCU or IOB
• Disconnected peripheral
351
6. Troubleshooting
Paper feed unit communication error
While the IOB communicates with a peripheral, an SC code is displayed if one of

following conditions occurs.
• The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the peripheral only just
622 D after the main switch is turned on.
• The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by URAT.
• Defective main control board of the peripheral

• Defective BCU or IOB
• Disconnected peripheral
2nd Paper Bank communication error
This SC is not issued for this machine.

623 D When a communication error signal between the 1st paper bank and 2nd paper bank
is received.
• Loose connector
636 D IC Card Error
External authentication module error
This SC is generated if the external authentication is enabled and following condition

occurs:
-01 -
• No external authentication module
• SD card error or external authentication module broken
• No DESS module
Version error
-02 - The version of the external authentication module is not correct.
• Incorrect module version
352
OSM User Code File Error
The correct "usercode" file could not be found in the root folder of the SD card
because the file is not present, or the existing file is corrupted or the wrong type file.
-11 -
Make sure the “usercode” file is installed in the root folder of the SD card where the
eccm.mod file is saved.
Note: Check the eccm.mod file is in the root folder of the SD card.
637 D Tracking Information Notice Error
Tracking Application Error
When the tracking information is lost, this SC is issued.

-01 -
• The machine failed to give notice the tracking information to the tracking SDK
application.
• Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
Tracking Information Notice Error
When the tracking information is lost, this SC is issued.

-02 -
• The machine failed to give notice the tracking information to the management
server.
• Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
BCU communication error
The BCU does not respond to the frame transmitted from the controller.
641 D
• Defective controller
• Detective BCU
Communication error of the remote service modem

650 B
(Embedded RCG-N)
353
6. Troubleshooting
Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to a defective communication line or defective
connection.
-05 - • Incorrect SP settings
• Disconnected telephone line
• Disconnected modem board
Consult with the user's local telephone company.
Modem board error 2
The modem board is installed even though the RCG-N is installed.

-14 -
• Disconnect the Wireless LAN or Ethernet LAN board
1. Uninstall the modem board, if it is installed.
2. Check that the Wireless LAN or Ethernet LAN is working properly.
Incorrect dial up connection
-01: Program parameter error
-02: Program execution error

651 C
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M) tries to call the
center with a dial up connection.
• Caused by a software bug
ID2 mismatching
ID2 for @Remote certification is mismatching between the controller board and
NVRAM.
• Used controller board installed

652 D • Used NVRAM installed
1. Install the correct controller board or new controller board.

2. Install the correct NVRAM or new NVRAM.
354
ID2 error
ID2 stored in the NVRAM is incorrect.
• Used NVRAM installed

653 D
Clear the ID2 in the NVRAM, and then input a correct ID2.
669 D EEPROM error
355
6. Troubleshooting
[1] Open communication error: ID error
[2] Open communication error: Channel error
[3] Open communication error: Device error
[4] Open communication error: Communication failed error
[5] Open communication error: Communication time error
Open communication error: Communication suspended

[6]
error
[7] Open communication error: Buffer full error
[8] Close communication error: No error code
[9] Close communication error: ID error
[10] Close communication error: No error code
[11] Data write error: ID error

- -
[12] Data write error: Channel error
[13] Data write error: Device error
[14] Data write error: Communication suspended error
[15] Data write error: Communication time over error
[16] Data write error: Communication suspended error
[17] Data write error: Buffer full error
[18] Data write error: No error code
[19] Data read error: ID error
[20] Data read error: Channel error
[21] Data read error: Device error
[22] Data read error: Communication failed error
[23] Data read error: Communication time over error
356
[24] Data read error: Communication suspended error
[25] Data read error: Buffer full error
[26] Data read error: No error code
[27] Device detection error: ID error
[28] Device detection error: Channel error
[29] Device detection error: Device error
[30] Device detection error: Communication failed error

- -
[31] Device detection error: Communication time over error
[32] Device detection error: Communication suspended error
[33] Device detection error: Buffer full error
[34] Device detection error: No error code
Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine has detected the
EEPROM error.
• Caused by noise
Engine startup error
The BCU fails to respond with the prescribed time when the machine is turned on.
670 D • Connections between BCU and controller board are loose, disconnected, or
damaged
1. Replace the BCU
2. Replace the controller board
SC672
RTB 17 Transmission error in controller board
674 D Video transmission error is detected in the controller board.
• Defective Controller Board
357
6. Troubleshooting
Memory address (PER) command error
The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the controller for the
prescribed time after the paper has reached the registration sensor.
687 D • Harness Disconnection at BCU
• Controller board loose or broken
• Defective BCU
• Defective Controller Board
SC Tables: SC7xx
720 B 3000-Sheet Finisher Error
Finisher exit guide plate motor error
• The exit guide plate HP sensor does not detect the home position of the exit guide
plate within the specified number of pulses after the exit guide plate has moved to
its home position.
• The exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of
pulses after the exit guide plate has moved from its home position.
-24 - The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
• Exit guide plate motor disconnected, defective

• Exit guide plate motor harness is loose or broken
• Exit guide plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Exit guide plate HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Exit guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
358
Finisher punch motor error
• The punch HP sensor does not detect the home position of the punch unit within the
specified number of pulses after the punch unit has moved to its home position.
• The punch HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of pulses after
the punch unit has moved from its home position.
-25 - The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
• Punch motor disconnected or defective

• Punch motor harness is loose or broken
• Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Punch HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Punch motor overload due to obstruction
Finisher jogger motor error
• The jogger HP sensor does not detect the home position of the jogger fences
within the specified number of pulses after the jogger fences have moved to its
home position.
• The jogger HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of pulses after
the jogger fences have moved from its home position.
The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
-30 -
• Jogger motor disconnected, defective
• Jogger motor harness is loose or broken
• Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Jogger HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Defective main board
359
6. Troubleshooting
Stack feed-out motor error
• The stack feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stack feed-
out belt within the specified number of pulses after the stack feed-out belt has
moved to its home position.
• The stack feed-out HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of
pulses after the stack feed-out belt has moved from its home position.
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
-41 -
• Stack feed-out motor disconnected, defective
• Stack feed-out motor harness is loose or broken
• Stack feed-out HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Stack feed-out HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Stack feed-out motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Defective main board
Finisher stapler movement motor error
• The stapler HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stapler within the
specified number of pulses after the stapler has moved to its home position.
• The stapler HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of pulses after
the stapler has moved from its home position.
• Stapler movement motor disconnected, defective

• Stapler movement motor harness is loose or broken
• Stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Stapler HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Stapler movement motor overloaded due to obstruction
360
Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error
• The corner stapler HP sensor does not detect the home position of the corner
stapler within the specified number of pulses after the corner stapler has moved to
its home position.
• The corner stapler HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of
pulses after the corner stapler has moved from its home position.
• Corner stapler rotation motor disconnected, defective

• Corner stapler rotation motor harness is loose or broken
• Corner stapler rotation HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Corner stapler rotation HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Corner stapler rotation motor overloaded due to obstruction
Finisher corner stapler motor error
• The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after operating.
• Staple jam
-44 -
• Corner stapler motor disconnected, defective
• Corner stapler motor harness is loose or broken
• Corner stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Corner stapler HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Corner stapler motor overloaded
361
6. Troubleshooting
Finisher folder plate motor error
• The folder plate HP sensor does not detect the home position of the folder plate
within the specified number of pulses after the folder plate has moved to its home
position.
• The folder plate HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of pulses
after the folder plate has moved from its home position.
• Folder plate motor disconnected, defective

• Folder plate motor harness is loose or broken
• Folder plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Folder plate HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
Folding unit bottom fence lift motor
• The folding unit bottom fence HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
folding unit bottom fence within the specified number of pulses after the folding
unit bottom fence has moved to its home position.
• The folding unit bottom fence HP sensor does not turn off within the specified
number of pulses after the folding unit bottom fence has moved from its home
position.
-53 -
• Folding unit bottom fence motor disconnected, defective

• Folding unit bottom fence motor harness is loose or broken
• Folding unit bottom fence HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Folding unit bottom fence HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Folding unit bottom fence motor overloaded due to obstruction
362
Clamp roller retraction motor error
• The clamp roller HP sensor does not detect the home position of the clamp roller
cam within the specified number of pulses after the clamp roller cam has moved to
its home position.
• The clamp roller HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of pulses
after the clamp roller cam has moved from its home position.
• Clamp roller retraction motor disconnected, defective

• Clamp roller retraction motor harness is loose or broken
• Clamp roller HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Clamp roller HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Clamp roller retraction motor overloaded due to obstruction
Stack junction gate motor error
• The stack junction gate HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stack
junction gate within the specified number of pulses after the stack junction gate has
moved to its home position.
• The stack junction gate HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of
pulses after the stack junction gate has moved from its home position.
• Stack junction gate motor disconnected, defective

• Stack junction gate motor harness is loose or broken
• Stack junction gate HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Stack junction gate HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Stack junction gate motor overloaded due to obstruction
Booklet stapler motor error 1
The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the specified
time.
-60 -
• Staple jam
• Front stapler motor disconnected, defective
• Front stapler motor harness is loose or broken
• Front stapler motor overloaded
363
6. Troubleshooting
Booklet staple motor error 2
The rear stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the specified
time.
-61 -
• Staple jam
• Rear stapler motor disconnected, defective
• Rear stapler motor harness is loose or broken
• Rear stapler motor overloaded
Tray lift motor error
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the specified time
after the tray raises or lowers.
-70 - • Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
• Tray lift motor harness is loose or broken
• Upper tray paper height sensor disconnected, defective
• Upper tray paper height sensor is loose or broken
• Tray lift motor overloaded due to obstruction
Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error
• The shift roller HP sensor does not detect the home position of the upper tray within
the specified number of pulses after the upper tray has moved to its home position.
• The shift roller HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of pulses
after the upper tray has moved from its home position.
• Shift tray motor disconnected, defective

• Shift tray motor harness is loose or broken
• Shift tray HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Shift tray HP sensor is loose or broken
• Shift tray motor overloaded due to obstruction
364
Shift jogger motor 1 error
The side fence does not retract within the specified number of pulses after the shift
jogger motor 1 switches on.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
-72 - • Shift jogger motor 1 disconnected, defective
• Shift jogger motor 1 harness is loose or broken
• Shift jogger 1 HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Shift jogger 1 HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Shift jogger motor 1 overloaded due to obstruction
Shift jogger motor 2 error
The side fence does not retract within the specified number of pulses after the shift
jogger motor 2 switches on.
-73 - • Shift jogger motor 2 disconnected, defective
• Shift jogger motor 2 harness is loose or broken
• Shift jogger 2 HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Shift jogger 2 HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Shift jogger motor 2 overloaded due to obstruction
Shift jogger retraction motor error
The side fences do not retract within the specified number of pulses after the retraction
motor switches on.
-74 - • Shift jogger retraction motor disconnected, defective
• Shift jogger retraction motor harness is loose or broken
• Shift jogger retraction HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Shift jogger retraction HP sensor harness is loose or broken
• Shift jogger retraction motor 2 overloaded due to obstruction
365
6. Troubleshooting
Return roller motor error
This occurs during the operation of the lower tray pressure motor.
• Motor disconnected, defective

-75 -
• Motor harness disconnected, defective
• Home position sensor disconnected, defective
• Home position sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Motor overloaded due to obstruction
Punch movement motor error
• The punch movement HP sensor does not detect the home position of the punch
unit within the specified number of pulses after the punch unit has moved to its
home position.
• The punch movement HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of
-80 - pulses after the punch unit has moved from its home position.
• Punch movement motor disconnected, defective

• Punch movement motor harness is loose or broken
• Punch movement motor overloaded due to obstruction
Paper position sensor slide motor error
The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position within the
specified number of pulses.
• Paper position sensor slide motor harness disconnected, defective

• Paper position sensor slide motor harness is loose or broken
• Paper position sensor slide motor overloaded due to obstruction
722 B 1000-Sheet Finisher Error
366
Upper transport motor error
The upper transport motor in the finisher is not operating.
-10 - • The motor harness is loose or broken

• Upper transport motor disconnected, defective
• Upper transport motor overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper
scraps, etc.)
Lower transport motor error
The lower transport motor in the finisher is not operating.

• Lower transport motor disconnected, defective
• Lower transport motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper
scraps, etc.)
Exit motor error
The exit motor in the finisher is not operating.

• Exit motor disconnected, defective
• Exit motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps,
etc.)
Finisher exit guide plate motor error
• The exit guide plate HP sensor does not detect the home position of the exit guide
plate within the prescribed time after the exit guide plate has moved to its home
position.
• The exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed time after the
exit guide plate has moved from its home position.
• Exit guide plate motor harness loose, broken

• Exit guide plate HP sensor harness loose, broken
• Exit guide plate motor disconnected, defective
• Exit guide plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Finisher exit guide plate motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed
paper, paper scraps, etc.)
367
6. Troubleshooting
Jogger fence motor error
• The jogger HP sensor does not detect the home position of the jogger fences
within the prescribed time after the jogger fences have moved to its home position.
• The jogger HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed time after the jogger
fences have moved from its home position.
The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
-30 -
• The motor harness is loose or broken
• Jogger fence HP sensor harness loose, broken
• Jogger fence motor disconnected, defective
• Jogger fence HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Jogger motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps,
etc.)
Feed-out belt motor error
• The feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the feed-out belt
within the prescribed time after the feed-out belt has moved to its home position.
• The feed-out HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed time after the feed-
out belt has moved from its home position.
-41 -
• Feed-out belt motor harness loose or broken
• Feed-out belt HP sensor harness loose or broken
• Feed-out belt motor disconnected, defective
• Feed-out belt HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Feed-out belt motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper
scraps, etc.)
368
Stapler movement motor
• The stapler HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stapler within the
prescribed time after the stapler has moved to its home position.
• The stapler HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed time after the stapler
has moved from its home position.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
-42 -
• Stapler movement motor harness loose or broken
• Stapler HP sensor harness loose, broken
• Stapler movement motor disconnected, defective
• Stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Stapler or motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper
scraps, etc.)
Corner stapler motor error
• The corner stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after
operating.
• The corner stapler HP sensor does not detect the home position of the corner
stapler within the prescribed time after the corner stapler has moved to its home
position.
• The corner stapler HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed time after the
corner stapler has moved from its home position.
-44 -
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
• Staple jam
• Corner stapler motor disconnected, defective
• Corner stapler motor harness is loose or broken
• Corner stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Number of sheets in stack exceeds allowed number of sheets for stapling
• Stapler motor obstructed
369
6. Troubleshooting
Tray lift motor error
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the specified time
after the tray raises or lowers.
-70 -
• Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
• Tray lift motor harness is loose or broken
• Stack height sensor disconnected, defective
• Tray lift motor overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.)
Shift tray motor error
• The shift roller HP sensor does not detect the home position of the upper tray within
the specified number of pulses after the upper tray has moved to its home position.
• The shift roller HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of pulses
after the upper tray has moved from its home position.
• Shift tray motor disconnected, defective

• Shift tray motor harness is loose or broken
• Shift tray HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Shift tray motor overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.)
Shift motor error
The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1.86 seconds after the shift
770 B motor has turned on at power on or during its operation.
• Defective shift motor

• Defective shift motor HP sensor
Bridge unit error
The machine recognizes the finisher, but does not recognize the bridge unit.
791 D
• Bridge unit is not installed
• Bridge unit is installed incorrectly
• Defective bridge unit
370
Finisher error
The machine does not recognize the bridge unit finisher, but recognizes the bridge unit.
792 B
• Poor finisher connector connections
• Finisher is not installed although the bridge unit is installed on the machine
• Defective finisher
SC Tables: SC8xx
Energy save I/O sub-system error
816 D Energy saver sub-system detects an error.
• Defective controller board
-01 - Sub-system error
-03 - STR denied error
-04 - Kernel communication driver error
-05 - STR preprocessing error
-13 - open () error
-14 - Memory address designation error
-15
to - open () error
-18
-19 - double open () error
-20 - open () error
-22 - Parameter error
-23
to - read () error
-24
-25 - write () error
371
6. Troubleshooting
-26
to - write () communication retry error
-28
-29
to - read () communication retry error
-30
-36
to - Sub-system error
-94
Monitor Error
This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot loader
attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root system files from the
817 C OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted.
• OS Flash ROM data defective; change the controller firmware

• SD card data defective; use another SD card
Watchdog timer error
The watchdog timer detect the error even if system processing normally.
818 C
• System program defective
• Optional board defective
372
Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing. One of the
following messages was displayed on the operation panel.
0x6261 6261 6420 6469 7200 00 -> “bad dir”
0x696e 0x69742064 -> “init died”
0x766d 0x5f706167 -> “vm_pageout: VM is full”

819 C 554C UL (USB error)
---- Error in the OS
“init died”, “vm_pageout: VM is full”, “Cache Error”
• System program defective

• Optional board defective
• Replace controller firmware
• For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can
read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
Self-diagnostics error: CPU

820 C
[XXXX]: Detailed error code
373
6. Troubleshooting
CPU error
During the self-diagnostic, the controller CPU detects an error. There are 47 types
of error code (0001 to 4005) depending on the cause of the error. The CPU
detects an error and displays the specific error code with the program address
where the error occurs.
• System firmware problem

[0001] to [06FF]
1. Turn the main switch off and on.
[0801] to
[4005] 2. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
3. Replace the controller.
When the problem cannot be fixed with the above procedure, the following
information displayed on the screen needs to be fed back to a technical support
center.
• SC code
• Detailed error code
• Program address
CPU/Memory Error
• System firmware problem

• Defective RAM-DIMM
[0701] to
[070A]
1. Reinstall the controller system software.
2. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
3. Replace the controller.
82 C Self-diagnostics error: ASIC

1 [XXXX]: Detailed error code
ASIC error
The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC.

[0B00]
• Defective ASIC device
Replace the controller board.
374
Self-diagnosis error: ASIC
The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the CPU timer. If
the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range, this SC code is displayed.
[0D05] • System firmware problem
• Defective RAM-DIMM
Video bridge device (ASIC) error 1
[50A1] The CPU does not detect the video bridge device.
• Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
Video bridge device (ASIC) register error 1
The CPU detects the video bridge device, but detects error data from the video
[50A2]
bridge device.
• Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
• For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can
read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
Self-diagnostic error: HDD

822 B
Check performed only when HDD is installed:

• HDD device busy for over 31 s.
• After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy for
[3003] over 6 s.
• HDD defective
• HDD harness disconnected, defective
No response to the self-diagnostic command from the ASIC to the HDDs.

[3004]
• HDD defective
375
6. Troubleshooting
Self-diagnostic error: NIB

823 B
MAC address check sum error

[6101]
The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM.
PHY IC error
[6104]
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.
PHY IC loop-back error

[6105]
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller.
Self-diagnostic error : NVRAM
NVRAM device does not exist, NVRAM device is damaged, or NVRAM socket
damaged.
824 C • NVRAM defective
• NVRAM backup battery exhausted
• NVRAM socket damaged
826 C Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/optional NVRAM
The one second counted by the RTC is different from the one second counted by the
[1501] CPU on the controller.
• Defective RTC device
The RTC device is not detected.
• Defective RTC device

[15FF]
• NVRAM without RTC installed
• Discharged backup battery
Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM

827 C
376
Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM).
[0201]
• Loose connection
• Defective SDRAM DIMM
Resident memory error
The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are incorrect or unreadable.
• Defective RAM DIMM

[0202]
• Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
• Defective 12C bus
Replace the RAM DIMM.
Self-diagnostic error: ROM

828 C
Check sum error 1

• The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is checked. If the
[0101] check sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code is displayed.
1. Replace the controller board.
Self-diagnostic error: Optional RAM

829 B
Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the optional RAM (SDRAM DIMM).
• Loose connection
• Defective SDRAM DIMM
[0301]
Turn the main switch off and on.

Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
Replace the controller.
377
6. Troubleshooting
Memory structure data error
The memory structure data error for the optional RAM (SDRAM DIMM) is detected
when the self-diagnostic is executed.
[0302] • Defective RAM DIMM

• Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
• Defective 12C bus
Replace the RAM DIMM.
833 C Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI configuration,
[0F30] the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
[0F31]
Replace the bridge board.
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI configuration,
[0F41] the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
[50B1] Check for loose connections at the mother board.
Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.
[50B2] Check for loose connections at the mother board.
835 B Self-diagnostic error: Centronic device
Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error.
• IEEE1284 connector error

[1102]
• Centronic loopback connector defective
378
Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error.
• ASIC device error

[110C] • IEEE1284 connector error
• Centronic loopback connector defective
Centronic loopback connector is not connected for detailed self-diagnostic test.
• Centronic loopback connector not connected correctly

[1120] • Centronic loopback connector defective
• ASIC device defective
838 C Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator
A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator via the
I2C bus.
• Defective clock generator

[2701]
• Defective I2C bus
• Defective I2C port on the CPU
839 C USB NAND Flash ROM error
USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.

[9001]
The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.

[9101]
The USB NAND Flash ROM controller is disconnected.

[9110]
379
6. Troubleshooting
EEPROM error 1: EEPROM access
• During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd reading failure
840 D causes this SC code.
• During the I/O processing, a writing error occurred.
Defective EEPROM
EEPROM reading error
841 D Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM.
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
Nand-Flash update VerifyError
SCS detected abnormal writing (verifying Error) in the module which

is written in Nand-Flash on the time of ROM remote update or ROM update.
842 C
• This SC is logged at 1st error detection.SC819 is issued at 2nd error detection.
• SC819 is issued at 2nd error detection.
Defective Nand-Flash (controller board)
IEEE 1394 I/F error
Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F.

851 B
Not supported by this machine
• NIB (PHY), LINK module defective; change the Interface Board
Controller board defective
Wireless LAN Error 1
During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is inserted into the
controller board.
853 B
• During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is inserted into the
controller board.
380
Wireless LAN Error 2
During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is pulled out from the
controller board.
854 B
• During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is pulled out from
the controller board.
Wireless LAN error
An error is detected on the wireless LAN card (802.11a/g, g).

855 B
• Wireless LAN card defective
• Wireless LAN card connection incorrect
USB I/F Error
The USB driver is not stable and caused an error.

857 B
• Bad USB card connection
Replace the controller board
HDD Encryption unit error 1

858 A A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the
HDD encryption unit.
Encryption key acquisition error:

The controller fails to get a new encryption key.
-00 -
Encryption key setting for HDD error:

The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD.
-01 -
• Defective SATA chip on the controller board
381
6. Troubleshooting
NVRAM data encryption error 1:

An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-02 -
• Defective NVRAM on the controller board
Replace the NVRAM.
NVRAM data encryption error 2:

An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-30 -
Other error:
-31 - A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted.
• Same as SC991
HDD Encryption unit error 2

859 B A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key
with the HDD encryption unit.
HDD check error:

The HDD is not correctly installed.
• No HDD installed
-01 - • Unformatted HDD
• The encryption key on the controller is different from the one on the HDD
1. Install the HDD correctly.
2. Initialize the HDD.
Power failure during the data encryption:

The data encryption (NVRAM and HDD) has not been completed.
-02 -
• Power failure during the data encryption
Initialize the HDD.
Data read/write error:
-10 - The DMAC error is detected twice or more.
• Same as SC863
382
HDD startup error at main power on
• HDD is connected but a driver error is detected.

• The driver does not respond with the HDD within 30 s.
860 B
• HDD is not initialized
• Label data is corrupted
• Defective HDD
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-001.
HDD re-try failure
At power on, the HDD is detected. Power supply to the HDD is interrupted after the
system has entered the energy save mode, but after the HDD has been awakened from
the energy save mode, it does not return to the ready status within 30 sec.
861 D
• Harness between HDD and controller board disconnected, defective
• HDD power connector disconnected
• HDD defective
Bad sector number error
The number of bad sectors in the HDD (image data area) goes over 101.
862 D • Defective HDD
Format the HDD with SP5832-001.

Replace the HDD.
863 D HDD data read failure
383
6. Troubleshooting
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad sectors generated
during operation.
Note: [001] to [023] indicate the type of partition where the error occurred.
[001] An area which does not belong to a partition
[002] a partition
[003] b partition
[004] c partition
[005] d partition
[006] e partition
[007] f partition
[008] g partition
- - [009] h partition
[010] I partition
[011] j partition
[012] k partition
[013] l partition
[014] m partition
[015] n partition
[016] o partition
[017] p partition
[018] q partition
[019] r partition
384
[020] s partition
[021] q partition
[022] t partition
- - [023] u partition
• HDD defective
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition, the bad sector information
is written to NVRAM, and the next time the HDD is accessed, these bad sectors will not
be accessed for read/write operation.
864 D HDD data CRC error
385
6. Troubleshooting
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data transfer
does not execute normally while data is being written to the HDD.
[002] a partition
[003] b partition
[004] c partition
[005] d partition
[006] e partition
[007] f partition
[008] g partition
[010] I partition
[011] j partition
[012] k partition
[013] l partition
[014] m partition
[015] n partition
[016] o partition
[017] p partition
[018] q partition
[019] r partition
386
[020] s partition
[021] q partition
- - [022] t partition
[023] u partition
• HDD defective
865 D HDD access error
387
6. Troubleshooting
HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than those for
SC863, 864.
[002] a partition
[003] b partition
[004] c partition
[005] d partition
[006] e partition
[007] f partition
[008] g partition
[010] I partition
[011] j partition
[012] k partition
[013] l partition
[014] m partition
[015] n partition
[016] o partition
[017] p partition
[018] q partition
[019] r partition
388
[020] s partition
[021] q partition
- - [022] t partition
[023] u partition
• HDD defective.
SD card error 1: Confirmation
The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the SD card in the
controller slot immediately after the machine is turned on. The program on the SD card
contains electronic confirmation license data. If the program does not contain this
866 B license data, or if the result of the check shows that the license data in the program on
the SD card is incorrect, then the checked program cannot execute and this SC code is
displayed.
• Program missing from the SD card

• Download the correct program for the machine to the SD card
SD card error 2: SD card removed
867 D • The SD card in the slot is removed while the machine is on.
Insert the SD card, then turn the machine off and on.
868 D SD card error 3: SC card access
An error occurs while an SD card is used.
• SD card not inserted correctly

001, 002 • SD card defective
Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
389
6. Troubleshooting
Address book data error
The address book data cannot be read from the HDD, SD card or flash ROM on the
controller where it is stored, or the data read from the media is defective.
• Software defective:
Turn the machine off/on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then replace the
controller firmware.
• Data corruption
• HDD defective.
870 B
More Details
1. Do SP5846-046 (Initialize All Setting & Addr Book) to reset all address book
data.
2. Reset the user information with SP5832-001 (HDD – HDD Formatting (All)).
3. Replace the HDD.
4. If there is the address book data backed up with SD card, restore the address
book data. Configure the same address book encryption key as the one
configured when backing up.
HDD mail receive data error
• The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly at power on.
• The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly (can neither read nor
872 B write) while processing incoming email.
• HDD defective
• The machine is turned off while the HDD is being accessed.
Do SP5832-001 to format the all data on the HDD.
HDD mail send data error
An error is detected on the HDD immediately after the machine has been turned on, or
873 B power has been turned off while the machine has used the HDD.
1. Do SP5832-001 (HDD – HDD Formatting (All)) to initialize the HDD.

Replace the HDD
390
Delete All error 1: HDD
A data error is detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All option has been
used.
874 D Note:
The source of this error is the DataOverwriteSecurity module.
1. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
2. HDD defective
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error occurs while the machine deletes data from the HDD.
875 D -001 An error occurs in hddchack-i.
-002 Failed to delete data from the HDD.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again
Log Data Error

876 D An error is detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine
operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating.
Log Data Error 1
-01 - • Damaged log data file in the HDD
Log Data Error 2
• An encryption module not installed

-02 -
1. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 (“0” is off.)
2. Install the DESS module.
Log Data Error 3
• Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data

-03 -
1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-001.
2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 (“0” is off.)
391
6. Troubleshooting
Log Data Error 4
-04 - • Unusual HDD encryption function due to defective NVRAM data
Log Data Error 5
• Installed a NVRAM or HDD which was used in another machine

-05 -
1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-001.
Log Data Error 99
-99 - • Other than the above causes
Ask your supervisor.
878 D USB Flash Error
TPM system authentication error
The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM (security chip).

-00 -
• Incorrect updating for the system firmware
• Defective flash ROM on the controller board
USB Flash Error
File system in the USB flash device is defective.
-01 - • Cannot mount partition 3 in the USB flash device.

• Encryption key does not exist.
• Cannot find the file for KMMD to be operated.
TPM Error
An error occurred in TPM or in TPM driver.

-02 -
• TPM defective
392
TCSD Error
An error occurred in TPM or in TPM driver.

-03 -
• TPM defective
881 D Authentication area error
Authentication application error is detected.

-01 -
• Error data in an authentication application reaches the management limit.
Software performance error
If the processing program shows abnormal performance and the program is abnormally
899 D ended, this SC is issued.

• Software defective
SC Tables: SC9xx
Electrical total counter error
The total counter contains something that is not a number.
• NVRAM incorrect type

900 D • NVRAM defective
• NVRAM data scrambled
• Unexpected error from external source
• Counter was not finished counting which SRM demand during the SRM is receiving
the PRT.
920 B Printer error
393
6. Troubleshooting
-00 No response at PM start up
-01 Timeout error during the PM operation
-02 - Working memory error
-03 Cannot start-up the filtering process
-04 Abnormal exit from the filtering process
An internal application error was detected and operation cannot continue.
- - • Software defective; turn the machine off/on, or change the controller firmware
• Insufficient memory
921 B Printer font error
-00 - Resident font is not found
-01 - Option font is not found
A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
- - • A necessary font is not found in the SD card.

• The SD card data is corrupted.
925 B Net File function error
-00 - HDD is defective
-01 - NetFile management file is broken
The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile management
file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDDs are defective and they
cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router functions (delivery of received
faxes, document capture, etc.), Web services, and other network functions cannot be
- -
used.
HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code.
• Refer to the four procedures below (Recovery from SC 925).
Here is a list of HDD status codes:
394
Display Meaning
(-1) HDD not connected
(-2) HDD not ready
(-3) No label
(-4) Partition type incorrect
(-5) Error returned during label read or check
(-6) Error returned during label write or check
(-7) "filesystem" repair failed
(-8) "filesystem" mount failed
(-9) Drive does not answer command
(-10) Internal kernel error
(-11) Size of drive is too small
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
(-13) Device file does not exist
Recovery from SC 925

Procedure 1
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery
procedures for SC860 to SC865.
Procedure 2
If "Procedure 1" is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD – HDD Formatting (All)), then
turn the machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask the customer before
you do this SP code.
Procedure 3
If "Procedure 2" is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
Software error 1
990 D The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue.
• Software defective, re-boot
395
6. Troubleshooting
Software error 2
The software performs an unexpected function. However, unlike SC990, recovery

991 C
processing allows the program to continue.
• Software defective, re-boot
In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:

Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent logged
errors.
Undefined error
992 D Defective software program
• An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred
Application Item Error
The number of executed application items on the operation panel reach the
994 C
maximum limit for the operation panel structure.
• Too much executed application items
Software Error 3: Cannot select application function
An application does not start after the user pushed the correct key on the operation
panel.
997 B
• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not
installed correctly.
Software Error 4: Application cannot start
Register processing does not operate for an application within 60 s after the
machine power is turned on. No applications start correctly, and all end
998 D abnormally.
• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not
installed correctly.
396
Electrical Component Defects

Sensors
Component
CN Condition Symptom
(Symbol)
By-pass Paper Length 236-2 Open

Paper size error
Sensor (IOB) Shorted
Open Jam Z
Duplex Entrance 217-A8 (IOB)
Shorted Jam Z
217-A11 Open "Open Cover" is displayed.

Duplex Cover
(IOB) Shorted “Open cover" cannot be detected.
217-A14 Open Jam Z

Duplex Exit
(IOB) Shorted am Z (Jam 1)
The Paper End indicator lights even if

Open
paper is placed on the by-pass tray.
By-pass Paper End 217-B3 (IOB) The Paper End indicator does not light
Shorted even if there is no paper on the by-pass
tray.
217-B9, Open
By-pass Paper Size B10,B12,B13 Paper size error
(IOB) Shorted
CPU cannot detect the toner overflow

Open even the waste toner in the transfer belt
217-B15 unit is full.
Toner Overflow
(IOB) CPU detects the toner overflow even
Shorted the waste toner in the transfer belt unit
is not full.
397
6. Troubleshooting
Component
(Symbol)
No symptom, but this may cause Jam

A, and some pieces of paper are
Paper Feed 1 216-A4 (IOB) Open/Shorted
remaining at the paper feed unit when
tray 1 is opened.
Open Jam A
Relay 1 216-A7 (IOB)
Shorted Jam A, B

Open
paper is placed in the paper tray 1.
216-A10
Paper End 1 The Paper End indicator does not light
(IOB)
Shorted even if there is no paper in the paper
tray 1.
216-A13 Open/
Tray Lift 1 SC501 is displayed.
(IOB) Shorted
No symptom, but this may cause Jam A

Open/ and some pieces of paper are
Paper Feed 2 216-B4 (IOB)
Shorted remaining at the paper feed unit when
tray 2 is opened.
Open Jam A
Relay 2 216-B7 (IOB)
Shorted Jam A, B

Open
paper is placed in the paper tray 2.
216-B10
Paper End 2 The Paper End indicator does not light
(IOB)
Shorted even if there is no paper in the paper
tray 2.
216-B13 Open/
Tray Lift 2 SC502 is displayed.
(IOB) Shorted
Open Jam A (Jam 8, 17)

Registration 209-2 (IOB)
Shorted Jam A, B (Jam 1)
398
Component
(Symbol)
209-4, 5, 5, 8 Open/
Paper Size 1 Paper size error in tray 1
(IOB) Shorted
209-9, 10, Open/

Paper Size 2 Paper size error in tray 2
11, 13 (IOB) Shorted
Open/
Lower Paper Height 1 210-4 (IOB)
Shorted Remaining paper volume in tray 2 on
Open/ the LCD is wrong.
Lower Paper Height 2 210-7 (IOB)
Shorted
Open/
Upper Paper Height 1 210-12 (IOB)
Shorted Remaining paper volume in tray 1 on
Open/ the LCD is wrong.
Upper Paper Height 2 210-15 (IOB)
Shorted
221-A10 Open/
Junction Jam Jam C
(IOB) Shorted
Open Jam C
Paper Exit 221-B2 (IOB)
Shorted Jam C
Open Jam C
Fusing Exit 221-B5 (IOB)
Shorted Jam C
Paper overflow message is not

Open displayed when a paper overflow
condition exists.
Paper Overflow 221-B8 (IOB)
Paper overflow message is displayed
Shorted when a paper overflow condition does
not exist.
The add toner indicator blinks even if

Open
TD (Toner Density) 213-14 (IOB) there is toner in the development unit.
Shorted SC390 is displayed.
399
6. Troubleshooting
Component
(Symbol)
CPU detects the web end even the web

Open
is not used up.
Web End 208-16 (IOB)
CPU cannot detect the web end even
Shorted
the web is used up.
Open SC350 is displayed after copying.

ID (Image Density) 208-11 (IOB)
Shorted SC351 is displayed after copying.
CPU cannot detect paper even a sheet

Open
of paper remains at the fusing unit.
Fusing Entrance 208-8 (IOB) CPU detects paper even a sheet of
Shorted paper does not remain at the fusing
unit.
Switches
Component
(Symbol)
"Open Cover" is displayed even if the

Open
221-B10 right door is closed.
Right Door
(IOB) The LCD goes blank when the right
Shorted
door is opened.
903-1,2 Open The machine does not turn on.

Main Power
(PSU) Shorted The machine does not turn off.
"Doors/Covers Open" is displayed

Open
913-1,2 even if the front or right door is closed.
Interlock
(PSU) The LCD goes blank when the front or
Shorted
right door is opened.
400
Blown Fuse Conditions
Blown Fuse Conditions
• Use a correct rating fuse for the fuse replacement. Never use a wrong rating fuse. If do so, the
machine may be damaged.
Rating
Fuse Symptom at power on
115V 210 to 230V
Power Supply Board
FU21 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V SC 533 (Power to IOB)
FU22 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V No response
"Open Cover" is displayed.

FU23 10A / 250V 10A / 250V
(Power to Interlock Switch)
"Open Cover" is displayed.

FU24 10A / 250V 10A / 250V
(Power to Interlock Switch)
Alert LED turns on and operation panel does not

FU25 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V
turn on. (Power to MB)
Stack paper in the optional paper feed unit or LCT

is not detected. SC 503 is issued after opening
FU26 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V
and closing the tray 3 or 4. (Power to optional
PFU or LCT)
The machine does not detect a finisher. (Power to

FU27 6.3A / 250V 6.3 A/ 250V
optional Finisher)
FU101 15A / 250V 8A / 250V No response
FU102 12A / 250V 4A / 250V No response
401
6. Troubleshooting
Fuses
Fuse Address Part No. Q'ty
FU11 11071229 1
FU21, 22, 25, 26, 27 11071295 5
FU23, 24 11071216 2
FU101 Differs depending on the 1

voltage system.
• 100V : 11071252
• 200V: 11071218
FU102 Differs depending on the 1

voltage system.
• 100V: 11071320
• 200V: 11071217
FU103, 12, 14 11071225 3
402
7. Energy Saving
Energy Save
Energy Saver Modes
Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are
at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different. For example, if
the sleep mode timer is set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is saved before
240 min. expires.
Timer Settings
The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer settings)
• Sleep mode timer (1 – 240 min):
The machine waits this amount of time to enter the sleep mode.
Default setting: 1 min
• Eco Night Sensor (1/5/30/60/120 min):
The machine waits this amount of time to enter the sleep mode or to turn off the power
automatically after the night sensor ambient light level is low.
Default setting: Power Off / 120 min / 1
403
7. Energy Saving
Return to Stand-by Mode
The recovery time from the sleep mode is 15 sec.
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.

• If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy
costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy
use.
• If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the timer settings are not too
long. Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such as 60 min.) if the
customer is not satisfied.
• If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until 240
minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished using the
machine for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved.
• If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as explained
below.
Energy Save Effectiveness
SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode.
• 8941-001: Operating mode
• 8941-002: Standby mode
• 8941-004: Low power mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount
of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are
measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the actual
energy consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
• At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 004.
• At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 004 again.
• Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
measurement).
• Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
404
Energy Save
• Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
405
7. Energy Saving
Paper Save
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function
Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy
overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment.
1. Duplex:
Reduce paper volume in half!
2. Combine mode:
Reduce paper volume in half!
406
Paper Save
3. Duplex + Combine:
Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
• For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
• For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even though
two sheets are used.
How to calculate the paper reduction ratio
How to calculate the paper reduction ratio, when compared with Single-sided copying, with no 2-in-1
combine mode
Paper reduction ratio (%) = Number of sheets reduced: A/Number of printed original images: B x 100
• Number of sheets reduced: A
= Output pages in duplex mode/2 + Number of pages in Single-sided with combine mode +
Number of pages in Duplex with combine mode x 3/2
A = ((2) + (3) + (4))/2 + (5) + (6) x 3/2
• Number of printed original images: B
= Total counter6 + Number of pages in Single-sided with combine mode + Number of pages in
Duplex with combine mode
B = (1) + (5) + (6)
• (1) Total counter: SP 8581 001 (pages)
• (2) Single-sided with duplex mode: SP 8421 001 (pages)
407
7. Energy Saving
• (3) Double-sided with duplex mode: SP 8421 002 (pages)

• (4) Book with duplex mode: SP 8421 003 (pages)
• (5) Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421 004 (pages)
• (6) Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421 005 (pages)
408 EN
Model AL-P2
Machine Code: M132
Appendices
September, 2012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Appendix: General Specifications
General Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3
Main Frame.................................................................................................................................................... 3
Power Consumption....................................................................................................................................... 5
Printer Controller.............................................................................................................................................5
Supported Paper Sizes.......................................................................................................................................7
Paper Feed......................................................................................................................................................7
Paper Exit......................................................................................................................................................12
Software Accessories.......................................................................................................................................17
Printer Drivers............................................................................................................................................... 17
Utility Software............................................................................................................................................. 18
Optional Equipment......................................................................................................................................... 19
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D580)..............................................................................................................19
LCT 2000-sheet (D581)..............................................................................................................................19
LCT 1200-sheet (D631)..............................................................................................................................20
Bridge Unit (D634)......................................................................................................................................20
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)...................................................................................................................... 21
3000-Sheet Finisher (D636)...................................................................................................................... 22
Punch Unit (D570) for 3000-Sheet Finisher..............................................................................................24
Output Jogger Unit (B703)......................................................................................................................... 25
2. Appendix: PM Tables
Maintenance Tables........................................................................................................................................ 27
Mainframe....................................................................................................................................................27
Options......................................................................................................................................................... 30
3. Appendix: Service Program Mode Tables
Service SP Tables............................................................................................................................................. 33
SP1-xxx.........................................................................................................................................................33
Engine SP Tables-1.......................................................................................................................................... 42
SP1-xxx: Feed.............................................................................................................................................. 42
Engine SP Tables-2.......................................................................................................................................... 57
SP2-xxx: Drum..............................................................................................................................................57
Engine SP Tables-3.......................................................................................................................................... 78
SP3-xxx: Process..........................................................................................................................................78
1
Engine SP Tables-4.......................................................................................................................................... 81
SP4-xxx: Scanner.........................................................................................................................................81
Engine SP Tables-5.......................................................................................................................................... 82
SP5-xxx: Mode............................................................................................................................................ 82
Engine SP Tables-6........................................................................................................................................135
SP6-xxx: Peripherals................................................................................................................................. 135
Engine SP Tables-7........................................................................................................................................143
SP7-xxx: Data Log.....................................................................................................................................143
Engine SP Tables-8........................................................................................................................................158
SP8-XXX: Data Log2................................................................................................................................. 158
Input Check.................................................................................................................................................... 181
Copier........................................................................................................................................................ 181
Options.......................................................................................................................................................186
Output Check................................................................................................................................................. 190
Copier........................................................................................................................................................ 190
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)....................................................................................................................194
3000 /2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)......................................................................... 195
Test Pattern Printing........................................................................................................................................197
2
General Specifications
Main Frame
Configuration Desktop
Print Process Dry electrostatic transfer system
Resolution 200 / 300 / 600 dpi
Gradation 256 tones
First Print 3.5 seconds or less

(Normal mode) (A4 / LT LEF)
25 seconds or less from main power on. (23°C)

Warm-up Time
15 seconds or less from sleep mode off. (23°C)
A3 / DLT (11" x 17") - A5 LEF

Custom:
Standard Tray:
Width: 182 - 297 mm (7.2" - 11.7")
Length: 148 mm - 432 mm (5.8" - 17")
12" x 18" / 305 x 457.2 mm,

Print Paper Size
A3/ DLT (11" x 17") - A6 SEF, Postcard
By-pass Tray: Custom:
Width: 90 - 305 mm (3.6" - 12")
Length: 148 - 1260 mm (5.8" - 49.6")
Duplex: A3 / DLT(11" x 17") – A5 LEF / LT
Paper trays: 60 - 216 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover)
Print Paper Weight By-pass: 52 - 216 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover)
Duplex: 60 - 169 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond - 90 lb. Index)
Printing speed: Maximum 50 ppm (A4 / LT LEF)
3
3.5 seconds or less

First Print (Normal mode)
(A4 / LT LEF)
25 seconds or less from main power on. (23°C)

Warm-up Time
15 seconds or less from sleep mode off. (23°C)
Standard:
1,200 sheets
(550 sheets/tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by-pass tray)
Paper Capacity: Option:
4,400 sheets
(550 sheets/tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by-pass tray, 1200-sheet
LCT and 2000-sheet LCT)
Standard exit tray:

• 500 sheets (A4 / LT or less)
• 250 sheets (B4 / LG or more)
Bridge Unit Tray
• 250 sheets (A4 / LT or less)
Output Paper Capacity
• 125 sheets (B4 / LG or more)
1000-sheet finisher
• 250 + 1000 sheets (80 g/m2)
3000-sheet finisher:
• 250 + 3000 sheets (80 g/m2)
North America: 120 – 127V / 60Hz, 12 A
Power Source Europe/Asia: 220 – 240 V/50, 60 Hz, 7 A
Taiwan 110V/60Hz, 14 A
Dimensions
670 x 684 x 640 mm
(W x D x H)
Weight Less than 73 kg (160.9 lb.)
Toner Replenishment Cartridge exchange (630 g)
Total Counter Electric counter
4
General Specifications
Noise Emission:
48dB or less
Printing
Noise Emission:
72dB or less
Stand-by
Power Consumption
Basic Power Consumption
NA 874W
Operating
EU, Asia 874W
NA 3.5W or less
Sleep Mode
EU, Asia 3.5W or less
NA 1550W or less
Maximum
EU, Asia 1470W or less
• The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.

• In the above "Panel Off" condition, the polygonal mirror motor is not rotating.
Printer Controller
Standard
• RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
• PCL 6(XL)/5e
• PDF Direct
Printer Languages:
• Adobe PostScript 3
• MediaPrint: JPEG/TIFF
Option
• IPDS
5
PCL 5e:
300 x 300 dpi
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
PCL 6:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
Resolution and
PS3 / PDF Direct:
Gradation:
300 x 300 dpi / 600 x 600 dpi
XPS:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
IPDS:
300 x 300 dpi/ 600 x 600 dpi
PCL 6/5e (Standard):

• 45 Compatible fonts
• 13 International fonts, 6 Bitmap fonts
Resident Fonts: Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional) / PDF Direct
IPDS (Optional)
Standard:
• USB2.0 Type A (2 ports) and Type B
• Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)
• 3 SD slots (Operation panel, Option use, and service use)
Host Interfaces: Optional:
• Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T)
• IEEE1284 parallel x 1
• IEEE802.11a/b/g (Wireless LAN)
• NIC2Port (Print server)
Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX (Optional)
Standard: 512 MB
Memory Maximum: 1024 MB
(Resident 512 MB + Additional 512 MB)
HDD 120 GB
6
Supported Paper Sizes

Paper Feed
North America
BT: By-pass Tray, Std Tray: Standard Tray, Op Tray: Optional Tray, LCT 1000: Large Capacity Tray:
1000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit
Size LCT LCT

Paper BT Std Tray Op Tray DU
(W x L) 1000 1200
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm B B B - - S
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm B A A - - S
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm B B B B B S
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm B - - - - S
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm B A A - - S
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm B - - - - S
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm B B B - - S
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm B A A - - S
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm B B B - B S
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm B - - - - S
DLT SEF 11” x 17” A A A - - S
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" B A A - - S
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" B B B - - S
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" A A A - - S
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" A A A B B S
Government
8.25" x 14" B B B - - S
Legal SEF
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" B B B - - S
7
Size LCT LCT

(W x L) 1000 1200
F/GL SEF 8” x 13” B B B - - S
G LT SEF 8” x 10.5” B B B - - S
G LT LEF 10.5” x 8" B B B - - S
Eng Quatro SEF 8" x 10" B B B - - S
Eng Quatro LEF 10" x 8" B - - - - S
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" B B B - - S
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" B A A - - S
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" A - - - - S
12” x 18”
12” x 18” B B B - - -
(A3W) SEF
11” x 15” SEF 11” x 15” B B B - - S
11” x 14” SEF 11” x 14” B B B - - S
10” x 15” SEF 10” x 15” B B B - - S
10” x 14” SEF 10” x 14” B B B - - S
Com10 SEF 4.13"x 9.5" B - - - - -
Com10 LEF 9.5"x 4.13" B B B - - -
Monarch SEF 3.88"x 7.5" B - - - - -
Monarch LEF 7.5"x 3.88" B - - - - -
C5 SEF 162 x 229mm B - - - - -
C5 LEF 229 x 162mm B B B - - -
C6 SEF 114 x 162mm B - - - - -
C6 LEF 162 x 114mm B - - - - -
DL Env SEF 110 x 220mm B - - - - -
DL Env LEF 220 x 110mm B B B - - -
8
Size LCT LCT

(W x L) 1000 1200
Custom Width
Length
Custom BT Std / Op Tray LCT1000 / 1200 DU
90 -305mm 182 - 297mm 90 / 297mm

Width -
(3.55"- 12") (7.17"- 11.69") (3.55"- 11.69")
148 – 600mm 148 – 432mm 148 - 432mm

Length -
(5.83"- 23.62") (5.83"- 17") (5.83"- 17")
Remarks:
A Supported and the size is automatically detected.
Supported but the size is not automatically detected. (The size needs to be set by
B
operation panel and also printer driver.)
S Supported
- Not supported
Europe/ Asia
BT: By-pass Tray, Std Tray: Standard Tray, Op Tray: Optional Tray, LCT 1000: Large Capacity Tray:
1000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit
Size LCT LCT

(W x L) 1000 1200
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A A A - - Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm A A A - - Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm A A A B B Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm A - - - - Y
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm A A A - - Y
9
Size LCT LCT

(W x L) 1000 1200
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm A - - - - Y
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm B A A - - Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm B A A - - Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm B A A - B Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm B - - - - Y
DLT SEF 11” x 17” B B B - - Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" B B B - - Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" B B B - - Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" B A A - - Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" B B B B B Y
Government
8.25" x 14" B B B - - Y
Legal SEF
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" B B B - - Y
F/GL SEF 8” x 13” B B B - - Y
G LT SEF 8” x 10.5” B B B - - Y
G LT LEF 10.5” x 8" B B B - - Y
Eng Quatro SEF 8" x 10" B B B - - Y
Eng Quatro LEF 10" x 8" B - - - - Y
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" B B B - - Y
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" B B B - - Y
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" B - - - - Y
12” x 18”
12” x 18” B B B - - -
(A3W) SEF
11” x 15” SEF 11” x 15” B B B - - Y
11” x 14” SEF 11” x 14” B B B - - Y
10
Size LCT LCT

(W x L) 1000 1200
10” x 15” SEF 10” x 15” B B B - - Y
10” x 14” SEF 10” x 14” B B B - - Y
Com10 SEF 4.13"x 9.5" B - - - - -
Com10 LEF 9.5"x 4.13" B B B - - -
Monarch SEF 3.88"x 7.5" B - - - - -
Monarch LEF 7.5"x 3.88" B - - - - -
C5 SEF 162 x 229mm B - - - - -
C5 LEF 229 x 162mm B B B - - -
C6 SEF 114 x 162mm B - - - - -
C6 LEF 162 x 114mm B - - - - -
DL Env SEF 110 x 220mm B - - - - -
DL Env LEF 220 x 110mm B B B - - -
Width
Custom
Length
Custom BT Std / Op Tray LCT1000 / 1200 DU
90 -305mm 182 - 297mm 90 / 297mm

Width -
(3.55"- 12") (7.17"- 11.69") (3.55"- 11.69")
148 – 600mm 148 – 432mm 148 - 432mm

Length -
(5.83"- 23.62") (5.83"- 17") (5.83"- 17")
Remarks:
A Supported and the size is automatically detected.
Supported but the size is not automatically detected. (The size needs to be set by
B
operation panel and also printer driver.)
S Supported
11
- Not supported
Paper Exit
3000 Sheet Finisher (D636)
MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple, SS: Saddle Stitch,
2P: 2 Holes Punch, N2P: North Europe 2 Holes, 3P: 3 Holes Punch,
Punch 4 P: 4 Holes Punch, N4P: North Europe 4 Holes Punch
3000-sheet finisher
Size
Paper MF 2P/
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp SS 3P 4P N4P
N2P
A3 W 12" x 18" Y Y Y Y 30 15 - - - -
297 x
A3 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y Y Y Y
420 mm
210 x
A4 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 15 Y - - Y
297 mm
297 x
A4 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
210 mm
148 x
A5 SEF Y Y Y Y - - Y - - Y
210 mm
210 x
A5 LEF Y Y Y Y - - Y - - Y
148 mm
105 x
A6 SEF Y Y Y - - - - - - -
148 mm
257 x
B4 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y Y Y*4 Y*4
364 mm
182 x
B5 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 15 Y - - Y
257 mm
257 x
B5 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y Y Y Y
182 mm
12
3000-sheet finisher
Size
Paper MF 2P/
N2P
128 x
B6 SEF Y Y Y - - - - - - -
182 mm
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y Y Y Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y 50 15 Y - - Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y - - Y
Government 8.25" x
Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
Legal SEF 14"
5.5" x
Half Letter SEF Y Y Y Y - - Y - - Y
8.5"
7.25" x
Executive SEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y - - Y
10.5"
10.5" x
Executive LEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
7.25"
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
8.25" x
Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
13"
Folio SEF 11" x 15" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y Y Y
10" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y - Y
8" x 10" Y Y Y Y 50 - Y - - Y
267 x
8K Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y Y Y
390 mm
195 x
16K SEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y - - Y
267 mm
13
3000-sheet finisher
Size
Paper MF 2P/
N2P
267 x
16K LEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
195 mm
Custom Y Y Y - - - Y*3 Y*3 Y*3 Y*3
4.125" x
Com10 Env. Y Y*1 Y*2 - - - - - - -
9.5"
3.875" x
Monarch Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
7.5"
114 x
C6 Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
162 mm
162 x
C5 Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
229 mm
110 x
DL Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
220 mm
Remarks:
Y Supported
15 Output up to 15 sheets
- Not supported
*1: Minimum 100 mm or more, Maximum 600 mm or less

*2: Minimum 100 mm or more, Maximum 600 mm or less
• Longer paper (feed length) than DLT (432 mm) is not guaranteed in this mode.
*3: Minimum 100 mm for 2P, 230 mm for 3P, 255 mm for 4P, 125 mm for N4P
*4: Corner stapling is not available in this mode.
14
MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple
Size 1000-sheet finisher

Paper MF 1 Bin
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp
A3 W 12" x 18" Y Y Y Y 30 -
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y - Y
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y Y - Y
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y Y - - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Y Y - - - N
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Government
8.25" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y - Y
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
15
Size 1000-sheet finisher

Paper MF 1 Bin
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp
8.25" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
11" x 15" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Folio SEF
10" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
8" x 10" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Custom Y Y - - - -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Y - - - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" Y - - - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm Y - - - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm Y - - - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Y - - - - -
Remarks:
Y Supported
- Not supported
16
Software Accessories
Software Accessories
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to
select which components to install.
Printer Drivers
Printer Language Windows XP*1*6 Windows Vista*2*6 Windows 7*3*6
PCL 5e/6 Yes Yes Yes
PS3 Yes Yes Yes
Windows Server Windows Server

Printer Language Macintosh*7
2003*4*6 2008 or later*5*6
PCL 5e/6 Yes Yes No
PS3 Yes Yes Yes
*1 Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition / Home Edition

*2 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic / Home Premium / Business / Enterprise / Ultimate
*3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium / Professional / Enterprise / Ultimate
*4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition, Microsoft Windows Server
2003 R2 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition
*5 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard / Enterprise, Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
Standard / Enterprise
*6 Supports both versions (32/64 bit)
*7 Mac OS X 10.4 or later (native mode). Any versions higher than Mac OS X 10.7 are not supported.
• The PCL5c/6 and PS3 drivers are provided on the CD-ROM

• The PS3 drivers are all genuine Adobe PS drivers, except for Windows XP / 2003 / Vista / 7.
• A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver.
17
Utility Software
Software Description
Font Manager A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer
(XP / Vista) This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM
18
Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D580)
Paper Feed System: FRR
Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10% (Near end), and Empty)
Capacity: 550 sheets x 2 trays
Paper Weight: 60 to 216 g/m2 (16 to 80 lb. Cover)
Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
Power Consumption: Less than 40 W (Max.)/ Less than 25 W (Ave,)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 580 mm x 629 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.8" x 10.2")
Weight: 26 kg (57.3 lb.)
LCT 2000-sheet (D581)
Paper Size: A4 LEF/LT LEF
Paper Weight: 52 to 256 g/m2 (- to 68 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb.)
5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10%, Empty): Right Tray

Remaining Paper Detection:
4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Empty): Left Tray
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 55 W (Max.)/30 W (Ave.)
Size (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2")
19
LCT 1200-sheet (D631)
Paper Size: A4 LEF/LT LEF/B5 LEF
Paper Weight: 52 to 256 g/m2 (- to 68 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 1,200 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb.)
Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10%, Empty)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 55 W (Max.)/25 W (Ave.)
Size (W x D x H): 348 mm x 540 mm x 290 mm (13.7" x 21.3" x 11.4")
Bridge Unit (D634)
Standard sizes
A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT
Paper Size: Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 1260 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m2 to 256 g/m2, 16 lb. to 68 lb.
250 sheet (A4/ 81/2" x 111/2" or smaller: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)

Paper Capacity:
125 sheet (B4 81/2" x 111/2" or larger: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 415 mm x 412 mm x 111 mm (16.3" x 16.2" x 4.4")
Weight 5 kg (11 lb.)
20
Optional Equipment
Upper Tray
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm, A3 to A6, 11" x 17" to 5.5" x

Paper Size:
8.5"
Paper Weight: 52 to 256 g/m2 (14 to 68 lb. Bond)
250 sheets (A4, LT or smaller)

Paper Capacity:
50 sheets (B4, LG or larger)
Lower Tray
No staple mode:
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm, A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Paper Size:
Staple mode:
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4, B5, DLT to LT
No staple mode: 52 to 160 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond to 60 lb. Cover)

Paper Weight:
Staple mode: 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb. Bond)
50 sheets (A4, B5, LT)

Stapler Capacity:
30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)
No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (B4 /LG or larger: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple mode: (80 g/m2, 20 lb., number of sets)
Paper Size Sheets Sets

Paper Capacity: A4,/LT LEF, B5 LEF 2 to 9 100
A4,/LT LEF, 10 to 50 100 to 20
A4,/LT LEF, B5 LEF 10 to 50 50 to 10
A3, B4, DLT, LG 2 to 9 50
A3, B4, DLT, LG 10 to 30 50 to 10
21
Staple positions: Top, Bottom, 2 Staples
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 520 x 520 x 790 mm (20.5" x 20.5" x 31.2")
Finisher
Dimension (w x d x h) 657 mm x 613 mm x 960 mm (25.9" x 24.2" x 37.8")
Less than 54 kg (119 lb.) (no punch unit)

Weight
Less than 56 kg (123.5 lb.) (with punch unit)
Power Consumption Less than 96 W
Noise Less than 75 db
Configuration Console type attached base-unit
Power Source From base-unit
250 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Stack Capacity
50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14 or larger
Proof Tray A6 SEF, B6 SEF, A5-A3 SEF,

Paper Size
5.5" x 8.5"-11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 - 160 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond - 60 lb. Cover)
22
Optional Equipment
3,000 sheets A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5, 11" x 17"

1,500 sheets SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF, 8.5" x 11" SEF,
Stack Capacity 12" x 18" SEF
500 sheets A5 LEF

Shift Tray
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF,
100 sheets
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 5.5" x 8.5"- 11" x 17" SEF, 12" x

Paper Size
18" SEF
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 - 256 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond - 68 lb. Bond)
Staples
B5 - A3
Paper Size
8.5" x 11" - 11" x 17", 12" x 18"
Paper Weight 64 g/m2 - 90 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond - 20 lb. Bond)
Staple Position Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
50 sheets A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Same Paper Size
Stapling 30 sheets B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
Capacity
Mixed Paper A4 LEF + A3 SEF, B5 LEF + B4 SEF,
30 sheets
Size 8.5" x11" LEF + 11" x 17" SEF
Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge
Paper Size Pages/Set Sets
20 - 50 pages 150 - 60 sets

A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
2 - 19 pages 150 sets
Stapled Stack Capacity (same
A4 SEF, B5, 8.5" x 11" 15 - 50 pages 100 - 30 sets
size)
SEF 2 - 14 pages 100 sets
15 - 30 pages 100 - 33 sets

Others
2 - 14 pages 100 sets
23
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF

Stapled Stack Capacity (mixed
& B4 SEF, 8.5" x11" LEF 2 - 30 pages 50 set
sizes)
& 11" x 17" SEF,
Punch Unit (D570) for 3000-Sheet Finisher
NA 2/3 holes switchable
Available Punch Units EU 2/4 holes switchable
Scandinavia 4 holes
NA 2-holes Up to 5,000 sheets
NA 3-holes Up to 5,000 sheets
Punch Waste Replenishment EU 2-holes Up to 14,000 sheets
EU 4-holes Up to 7,000 sheets
Scandinavia 4-holes Up to 7,000 sheets
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 - 163 g/m2, 14 lb Bond - 43 lb Bond
SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

NA 2-holes
LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5" , 8.5" x 11"
SEF A3, B4, 11" x 17"

NA 3-holes
LEF A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Paper SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

EU 2-holes
Sizes LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"
SEF A3, B4, 11"x17"

EU 4-holes
LEF A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Scandinavia 4- SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

holes LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"
24
Optional Equipment
Output Jogger Unit (B703)
This jogger unit is installed above the shift tray of the Finisher SR4080.
Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity: 250 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb., A4 / LT)
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
Weight:
Size (W x D x H):
25
26
Maintenance Tables
Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
Mainframe
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 4 copies / original (prints/job)
Ratio 30%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Item 160K 320K 800K EM Remarks
Drum (OPC) Area
Charge Roller R
Charge Roller Cleaning

R
Roller
Drum Cleaning Blade 1 R
Side Seal C
Cleaning Entrance Seal C Blower brush
Perform SP3-001-2 after

OPC Drum R I
the replacement.
Pick-off Pawls R
Spurs C I Dry cloth
Quenching Lamp C
Perform SP3-001-2 after

ID Sensor C I
blower brush cleaning.
Development Unit
27
Development Case C I Dry cloth
Development Drive Gears I Dry cloth
Development Filter R
Developer R I
Entrance Seal C I
Side Seal C
Development Sleeve C Dry cloth
Transfer Belt Unit
Transfer Belt R
Dry cloth
To prevent damage to the
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade R cleaning blade, always
replace these items
together.
Transfer Belt Rollers C Dry cloth
Entrance Seal C Dry cloth
Used Toner Tank C Empty the tank
Seal (for paper dust) C
Transfer Entrance Guide C C Dry cloth
Fusing Unit
Hot Roller R
Pressure Roller R
Fusing Thermistors R
- R Blower brush or dry cloth
Cleaning Roller C
28
Maintenance Tables
Grease: Barrierta JFE

Cleaning Roller Bushings L
55/2
Fusing Entrance and Exit Damp cloth

C
Guide Plates Water / Alcohol
- R
Brake Pad R
- R
Paper Feed
Registration Roller C I Damp cloth
Registration Sensor C I Blower brush
Detach and tap gently on

Dust Blades C I flat surface to empty.
Blower brush.
Feed Rollers I I Damp cloth
Pick-up Belts I I Damp cloth
Separation Rollers I I Damp cloth
By-pass Feed Roller I I Damp cloth
By-pass Pick-up Roller I I Damp cloth
By-pass Separation Roller I I Damp cloth
Paper Feed Guides I I Blower brush or dry cloth
Relay Rollers I I Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad I I Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad (By-pass

I I Damp cloth
feed)
By-pass Feed Roller Gear L I Silicone Grease G-501
Relay Sensors C I Blower brush
29
Paper Feed Sensors I I Blower brush
Duplex Unit
Inverter Rollers I I Damp cloth
Transport Rollers I I Damp cloth
Entrance Sensor I I Blower brush
Exit Sensor C I Blower brush
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Sensor I I Blower brush
Junction Gate Jam sensor C I Blower brush
Fusing Exit Sensor I I Blower brush
Paper Exit Rollers I I Damp cloth
Junction Transport Roller I I Damp cloth
Paper Exit Guide I I Damp cloth
Options
Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints/ originals.

Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
Paper Feed Unit (D580)
Item EM Remarks
Feed Roller C Dry cloth
Separation Roller C Dry cloth
Pick-up Roller C Dry cloth
Paper Feed Sensor C Dry cloth
Relay Sensor C Dry cloth
30
Maintenance Tables
Item EM Remarks
Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth
1200-Sheet LCT (D631)
Item EM Remarks
2000-Sheet LCT (D581)
Item EM Remarks
31
Damp cloth
Rollers C
(Water / Alcohol)
Discharge Brush C C Dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I I Replace if required
Item EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth (Water / Alcohol)
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
Jogger Fences I Replace if required
3000-Sheet Finisher Punch Unit (D570)
Item EM Remarks
Punch Chads C Discard chads
Bridge Unit (D634)
Item EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth (Water / Alcohol)
Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth
32
3. Appendix: Service Program Mode
Tables
Service SP Tables
SP1-xxx
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never
occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the
printable area.
1001 Bit Switch
33
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Collate Normal Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have
a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
• If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL
switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
34
Service SP Tables
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be
changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Increases printing speed but simplex pages may be printed on the back side
of the sheet.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 IPDS support tools 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Enables the port for IPDS support tools.
1001 Bit Switch
35
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch

Disable Enable
Type" buttons on the operation panel.
If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch
bit 0 Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on the device and
configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch 0: Disable

1: Enable
occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this Bit Switch, the device can be configured
to print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering the

contents of a job
If this BitSw is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print data. This is
achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a module called the "GPS
Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of SDK
applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a

job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000 Disable Enable (1000)
jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via
Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 DFU - -
36
Service SP Tables
bit 6 Method for determining the image rotation for the

edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of
older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.

If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex job are
not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems with letterhead/pre-
printed pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.
1001 Bit Switch
1001 Bit Switch
Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable
bit 0 If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last
page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the
duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 3
37
PCL edge to edge printing setting 0: Disable 1: Enable
bit 4 (Standard) (BMS)
Switches the edge to edge printing setting for custom-made machines (BMS).
bit 5
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
"Disabled
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via "Enabled
USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediatel
(10 seconds)"
y)"
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device whether
to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled

Enabled
(Not
(Cancelled)
cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation (SEF/LEF) 0: Disable 1: Enable
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous generations. It only
takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" = "Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the bypass
tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch, the
MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by the MFP
bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
38
Service SP Tables
bit 4 Response to PJL USTATUS when multiple collated

copies are printed
When enabled, if multiple collated copies are printed, the device no longer
responds to PJL USTATUS with the number of pages in the current copy. Instead the
device will return the total number of pages for all copies.
Bit 5 DFU
- -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 List / Test Print Lock 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, you can lock or unlock the [List/Test Print] items under the Pinter Features
menu when the Store and Skip Errored Job Function is on.
Bit 6 Optional charge machines - -
If enabled, you can use the optional charge

machines when the Store and Skip Errored Job 0: Disable 1: Enable
Function is on.
Bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 List / Test Print menu 0: Disable 1: Enable
When enabled, the [Multiple Lists] menu is displayed in [List / Test Print] under the
Printer Features menu.
bit 1 Interrupt printing 0: Job 1: Page
Selects the units for the interrupt printing function.

When you select "0," you can interrupt printing of a job while being processed.
When you select "1," you can interrupt printing of a page while being processed.
39
Bit 2 DFU
- -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 7
1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 001
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 003 Delete Program
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Printer Summary

1004 001
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1005
1005 002
1007 [Supply Info.]
[0 to 1 / 1 ]
1007 001 0: Displays the info.
1: Does not display the info.
1110 [Media Print Device Setting]
1110 002 0: Disable 1: Enable Selects the setting for the media print device.
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]
40
Service SP Tables
0: Excluding New Job Selects whether to include an image

1111 001 processing job in jobs subject to full
1: Including New Job cancellation from the SCS job list.
41
Engine SP Tables-1
SP1-xxx: Feed
Leading Edge Registration

1001* Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation
timing.
001 Tray: Plain
002 Tray: Thick 1
003 Tray: Thick 2
004 By-pass: Plain

[–9 to 9/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
007 Duplex: Plain
008 Duplex: Thick 1
Side-to-Side Registration
1002* Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for
each mode.
001 By-pass
002 Tray 1
003 Tray 2
004 Tray 3 [–4 to 4/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 Tray 4
006 LCT
007 Duplex
42
Engine SP Tables-1
Registration Buckle Adjustment

1003* Adjusts the paper feed motor timing. Paper feed motor timing determines the amount of
paper buckle at Registration. (A "+" setting causes more buckling.)
001 Tray 1: Plain
002 Tray 1: Thick 1
003 Tray 1: Thick 2

[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
004 Tray 2, 3, 4: Plain
005 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick1
006 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick2
007 By-pass: Plain
008 By-pass: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -2 /1 mm step]
010 Duplex: Plain [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
011 Duplex: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -3 / 1 mm step]
012 LCT: Plain
013 LCT: Thick1 [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
014 LCT: Thick2
By-pass Paper Size Detection

1007*
Controls paper size detection for the by-pass feed table.
001 Detection Timing [-15 to 15 / 0 / 5 mm step]
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 LG Detection
0: LT SEF, 1: LG
43
Fusing Idling
Switches fusing idling on/off. When on, printing will not start until enough time has
elapsed so the hot roller can reach optimum temperature. This ensures even heat on
1103* the hot roller.
Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is incomplete (this may occur if the room
is cold.). You must switch SP1103-1 ON before you set the fusing interval with
SP1103-2.
001 Enable Fusing Idling 0 = Off, 1 = On
002 Interval [0 to 60 / 30 / 1 sec.]
Sets the machine to fusing idling only for 30 sec. for

every job (when the original is set on the ARDF,
when the ARDF cover is opened, etc.) and the fusing
003 Idling Time at Every Job unit has reached the reload temperature (optimum
temperature for operation).
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec.]
0: No idling done before a job.
44
Engine SP Tables-1
Fusing Temperature Control
On-Off/Phase
Selects the fusing temperature control method. After changing this setting, be sure to
turn the machine off and on again with the main power switch to enable the new
setting.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Normal (ON/OFF control). Allows full application from ac power supply to bring
the hot roller up to the target fusing temperature then shuts off. Determines the on-time
from the present temperature (detected by the thermistor on the hot roller) and the
temperature of 1 cycle before.
1: Phase (hysterisis) control. Sets the upper and lower limits for the temperature; at the
1104*
lower temperature the fusing lamp is on and at the higher temperature the fusing lamp
is off.
Change this setting to "0" only if the user has excessive electrical noise or interference
on the power supply line. Such interference can cause voltage to drop when power is
applied using the ON/OFF control method.
Interference can be caused by the general poor quality of the power supply lines, or if
the machine is sharing a power supply with other electrical devices such as fluorescent
lights. Before changing this setting, make sure that the machine is connected to a
power supply not shared by other electrical equipment.
• Selecting Phase control ("1") could cause the fusing temperature control board to
emit low pitched noise
Fusing Temperature Adjustment
Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at the center and ends of the roller for the
quality or thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this machine has two fusing lamps: one
1105* heats the center of the roller, the other heats both ends. Each fusing lamp can be adjusted
separately.
The "re-load temperature" is the "print ready temperature". When the fusing temperature
exceeds this setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a re-load temperature (Re-
load Temp. = Fusing. Temp – SP Value.) that is higher than the SP1-105-2 setting.
Roller Center [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]

001
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller.
45
Roller Ends [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]

002
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller.
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Center [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller. This setting depends on the
target temperature.
• Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 1 (Roller Center:
Trays)
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Ends [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends on the
target temperature.
• Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 2 (Roller Ends:
Trays)
005 to The following SPs adjust the fusing temperature at the center or ends of the hot roller for
022 each paper type.
005 Roller Center: M-Thick [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
006 Roller Ends: M-Thick [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg]

[100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]
008 Roller Ends: Thick 1

[100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
010 Wait Temp: Center Minus
011 Wait Temp: Ends Minus [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
012 Roller Ends: Thin [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
013 Roller Center: OHP: Plain [100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
014 Roller Ends: OHP: Plain

[100 to 170 / 155/ 1 deg]
015 Roller Center: OHP: Thick
46
Engine SP Tables-1
016 Roller Ends: OHP: Thick [100 to 170 / 160/ 1 deg]
023 Feed Waiting: Plain Turns the feed waiting mode on or off for each
paper type.
024 Feed Waiting: M-Thick
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025 Feed Waiting: Thick 1 0=Off, 1=On
026 Feed Waiting: Thick 2 The paper waits at the registration roller until
the fusing temperature reaches the prescribed
temperature (adjustable with SP1105-028 to
-37).
027 Feed Waiting: Thin If you enable this feature, also set SP
1105-38 to a convenient value for the
customer.
028 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Plain
029 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Plain
030 Feed Wait: Center Minus: M-Thick
031 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: M-Thick
032 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 1 Adjusts the offset value for each re-load
temperature to exit the feed waiting mode.
033 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 1 [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
034 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 2
035 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 2
036 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thin
037 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thin
47
Sets the maximum feed waiting time.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]
The paper is fed when the time specified with
038 Feed Waiting: Maximum Time this SP has passed even though the fusing
temperature has not reached the prescribed
temperature.
0: Disabled.
1106 Fusing Temperature Display
001 Roller Center Displays the temperature of the fusing unit.
002 Roller Ends [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
003 Machine Inside at Power On Displays the temperature inside the machine.
004 Machine Inside [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
Fusing Nip Band Check

1109
Checks the fusing nip band.
001 Execution
Idling Rotation Time [0 to 120 / 60 / 1 sec]

002*
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001.
Pre-Idling Time [5 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]

003*
Specifies the time that the paper stops in the fusing unit for measuring the nip.
Fusing Jam Detection

1159*
SC Display
48
Engine SP Tables-1
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0:OFF, 1:ON
This SP setting determines whether SC559 is issued after three paper late jams occur in
the fusing unit. After this SP code is turned on, a counter monitors the number of paper
late jams that occur in the fusing unit. After the 3rd occurrence of a fusing jam, SC559
is issued and the machine cannot be used until the service technician releases the error.
• Switching the machine off/on does not reset this jam counter. The counter is reset
after the cause of the jam has been removed and a sheet of paper successfully
passes the fusing exit sensor.
MotorSpeedAdjust
Adjusts the speeds of each motor. Each step decreases or increases motor speed in
0.05% increments
Regist: Registration motor, Feed: Feed motor,
1801* Duplex: Duplex/By-pass motor, Inverter: Duplex inverter motor,
Exit: Paper exit motor, Bridge: Bridge unit drive motor,
OpcMot: Drum motor, TransferMot: Transfer/Development Motor,
FusingMot: Fusing motor,
DevPuddleMot: Development Paddle motor

[-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.05 %]

[-2 to 2 / -0.4 / 0.05 %]

[-2 to 2 / -1 / 0.05 %]

[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
49

[-4 to 4 / -2.3 / 0.1 %]

[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]

[-4 to 4 / -0.2 / 0.1 %]

[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
50
Engine SP Tables-1
033 OpcMot:90
034 OpcMot:154
035 OpcMot:180
036 OpcMot:230
037 TransferMot:90
038 TransferMot:154
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %]
039 TransferMot:180
040 TransferMot:230
041 FusingMot:90
042 FusingMot:154
043 FusingMot:180
044 FusingMot:230
045 DevPuddleMot [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
1902* Cleaning Web Setting
Web Consumption [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 %]

001
Displays the consumed amount of the web roll.
Web Motor Interval [3 to 130 / 6.7 / 0.1 sec]

002
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation.
Web Motor Time [0.3 to 10 / 4.2 / 0.1 sec]

003
Adjusts the rotation time of the web motor.
EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
Web Near End Setting
004 ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]
Adjusts the threshold for web near end.

005
51

006
Paper Interval Time [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
007 Adjusts the threshold for paper feeding. When the time between trailing edge
detection and leading edge detection is within the value of this setting, the machine
determines that the paper is still being fed.
Web Motor Setting: Web End [0 to 60 / 27 / 1 sec]

008
Adjusts the motor rotation time after the web end.
Web Motor Rotation: Power On [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]

009
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the re-load state.
Web Motor Interval: Pre-idle [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]

010
Adjusts the motor waiting time after the fusing motor idling.
Web Motor Rotation: Pre-idle [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]

011
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the fusing idling state.
1903 Cleaning Web Setting
Total Paper Counter [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 sec]

001
Displays the total paper feeding time.
Total Web Motor Drive Time [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 sec]

002
Displays the total time of web motor rotation.
1904 FusingDuplex Set
Set 0:Off/1:On [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
001
0:Off/1:On
002 Aft Reload ChgTime [0 to 999 / 20 / 1 sec]
1907* Paper Feed Timing Adj. (DFU)
52
Engine SP Tables-1
001 Feed Solenoid ON: Plain

[-10 to 40 / 0 / 2.5 mm]
002 Feed Solenoid ON: Thick
003 Feed Solenoid OFF: Plain
004 Feed Solenoid OFF: Thick
005 Feed Clutch ON: Plain
006 Feed Clutch ON: Thick [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
007 Stop Position before Inverter
008 Stop Position after Inverter
009 Re-Feed Stop Position
010 By-pass Solenoid OFF [0 to 40 / 0 / 1 mm]
011 By-pass Solenoid ON [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
012 By-pass Feed Clutch ON
013 Exit Roller: Shift: 180
014 Exit Roller: Shift: 230
015 Exit: Junction Solenoid ON
016 Exit: Junction Solenoid OFF [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
017 Bridge: Junction Solenoid ON
018 Bridge: Junction Solenoid OFF
019 1-Bin: Junction Solenoid ON
020 1-Bin: Junction Solenoid OFF
021 Shift Motor ON [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
022 Re-Feed Stop Position S Size [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
F1 Plate Adjj (DFU)

1908*
Adjust the paper feed timing for the optional paper feed unit.
53
A3,DLT:100% [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]

001
Adjust the paper feed timing for plain paper.
A3,DLT:70% [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]

002
Adjust the paper feed timing for thick paper.
CPM Down Setting

1916* When this machine gets a sequence of coping/printing jobs, the machine uses CPM
down mode to prevent the fusing temperature from becoming too low.
001 Temp.: Plain
002 Temp.: M-Thick Adjusts the thresholds for each

environmental condition (between Low and
003 Temp.: Thick 1 Medium).
004 Temp.: Thick 2 [10 to 23 / 17 / 1 deg]
005 Temp.: Thin
006 ON/OFF: Low: Plain
007 ON/OFF: Low: M-Thick
008 ON/OFF: Low: Thick 1
009 ON/OFF: Low: Thick 2

Turns on or off the CPM down setting for
010 ON/OFF: Low: Thin each paper type and ambient temperature.
011 ON/OFF: Medium: Plain [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

0= Off, 1= On
012 ON/OFF: Medium: M-Thick
013 ON/OFF: Medium:: Thick 1
014 ON/OFF: Medium: Thick 2
015 ON/OFF: Medium: Thin
54
Engine SP Tables-1
016 Waiting Time: Low: Plain
017 Waiting Time: Low: M-Thick
018 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 1
019 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 2 Adjusts the threshold time to enter the CPM
down mode.
020 Waiting Time: Low: Thin [0 to 180 / 60 / 1 sec]
021 Waiting Time: Medium: Plain The machine determines whether the CPM
down mode is activated or not after the time
022 Waiting Time: Medium: M-Thick specified with these SPs has passed.
023 Waiting Time: Medium: Thick 1
024 Waiting Time: Medium: Thick 2
025 Waiting Time: Medium: Thin
026 Temp.: Low: Plain
027 Temp.: Low: M-Thick
028 Temp.: Low: Thick 1

Adjusts the threshold temperature of the
029 Temp.: Low: Thick 2 fusing unit to enter the CPM down mode.
030 Temp.: Low: Thin [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg]
If the temperature of the fusing unit is less
031 Temp.: Medium: Plain
than the temperature specified with these
032 Temp.: Medium: M-Thick SPs, the machine changes the CPM
(adjustable with SP1916-36 to -45).
033 Temp.: Medium: Thick 1
034 Temp.: Medium: Thick 2
035 Temp.: Medium: Thin
Adjusts the CPM in the CPM down mode.

036 CPM: Low: Plain
[30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]

037 CPM: Low: M-Thick
[30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]

038 CPM: Low: Thick 1
[5 to 25 / 25 / 5 cpm]
55

039 CPM: Low: Thick 2
[5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]
040 CPM: Low: Thin

041 CPM: Medium: Plain
[30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
042 CPM: Medium: M-Thick

043 CPM: Medium: Thick 1
[5 to 25 / 25 / 5 cpm]

044 CPM: Medium: Thick 2
[5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]

045 CPM: Medium: Thin
[30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
1930* OnOff Time Adjust
On Time Adjust [0 to 100 / 40 / 10 msec]

001 Adjusts the Off-On interval of the transfer belt contact motor. ("On" means that the
transfer belt is in contact with the drum.)
Off Time Adjust [0 to 100 / 20 / 10 msec]

002 Adjusts the On-Off interval of the transfer belt contact motor. ("Off" means that the
transfer belt is away from the drum.)
Tray Lock at Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON

1950*
Not used
56
Engine SP Tables-2
Engine SP Tables-2
SP2-xxx: Drum
2001* Charge Bias
Setting (Copying) [1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 V]

001
Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for copying.
Setting (P Pattern) [0 to 700 / 250 / 10 V]
002 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when making the VSDP ID sensor
pattern (for charge roller voltage correction). The actual charge roller voltage is this
value plus the value of SP2001-1.
2005* Bias Control
001 Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction.
increases by 30 V (e.g., from –500 to –530).
002 Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction.
decreases by 30 V (absolute value).

003
Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction.

004
Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction.

005
Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size.
2102* Magnification Adjustment
57
Main Scan [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 %]

001
Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for copy mode and printer mode.
Sub Scan [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]

002
Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for copy mode and printer mode.
Erase Margin Adjustment
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.

2103* L Size: 297.1 mm or more (length)
M Size: 216.1 to 297 mm (length)
S Size: 216 mm or less (length)
001 Leading Edge

[0 to 9 / 3 / 0.1mm]
002 Trailing Edge
003 Left
[0 to 9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
004 Right
005 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
006 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
007 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
008 Duplex Left: Plain

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
009 Duplex Right: Plain
010 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
011 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
012 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1mm]
013 Duplex Left: Thick

[0 to 1.5 / 0.1 / 0.1mm]
014 Duplex Right: Thick
58
Engine SP Tables-2
LD Power Adjustment(DFU)
2105* Adjusts the LD power for each mode.

Each LD power setting is decided by the process control.
001 LD1: Copy

[–50 to 79 / 5 /1 ]
002 LD2: Copy
003 LD1: Printer/Fax

[–50 to 79 / 5 /1 ]
004 LD2: Printer/Fax
2106* POL REV TIME (Polygon motor rotation time)
PRE TIME [0 to 60 / 10 /1 sec]
001 Adjusts the time of polygon motor rotation before a job.
If this is set to "0", this SP is not activated.
POST TIME [0 to 60 / 0 /1 sec]
Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation after a job.

002
If this is set to "0", the polygon motor never switches off in standby mode. However, if
the machine enters the energy saver mode, the polygon motor will ignore the zero
setting and switch itself off.
2109 Test Pattern
[0 to 24 / 0 /1 ]
001 Pattern Selection
Test pattern of the GAVD
59
0: None
14: Trimming Area
15: Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
16: Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
17: Black Band (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line
18: Black band ( Vertical)
6: Grid Horizontal Line
19: Checker Flag Pattern
7: Grid pattern small
20: Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
8: Grid Pattern Large
21: Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
9: Argyle Pattern Small
22: Two Beam Density Pattern
10: Argyle Pattern Large
23: Full Dot Pattern
11: Independent pattern (1 dot)
24:All white Pattern
[0 to 15 / 15 /1 ]
002 Density Set the density of the test pattern which is output in
SP2109-001. This SP is not used for the Grayscale patterns.
2201* Development Bias Adjustment
Development Bias [200 to 700 / 560 / 10V ]
001 Adjusts the development bias for copying.
Use as a temporary measure to correct faint copies from an aging drum.
ID Sensor Pattern [200 to 700 / 400 / 10V ]

002
Adjusts the development bias for the ID sensor pattern for VSP
Forced Toner Supply

2207 Forces the toner bottle to supply toner at 1-second intervals for up to 30 seconds. To
start, press [EXECUTE].
60
Engine SP Tables-2
Toner Supply Mode [0: Sensor, 1: pixel ]
2208* Selects the toner mode.

If you select "1", SP2-209-002 should be set to its default value. Use image pixel
count modes only as a temporary measure if the ID or TD sensor is defective.
2209* Toner Supply Rate
Toner Rate [10 to 800 / 60 mg/s / 5 mg ]
Sets the amount of toner supplied every second by the toner supply motor. The length
001 of time the motor remains on is determined by the data read by the TD sensor and ID
sensor.
Increasing this value reduces the toner supply clutch on time. Use a lower value if the
user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of black.
Correction Data [25 to 300 / 300 / 25 ]
Displays the toner supply correction coefficient (K). It can also be used to adjust K, but
002 the value is changed again when VT is measured for the next copy.
The toner supply rate depends on the amount of toner in the toner bottle. This change is
corrected using this coefficient. This SP can be used to check the toner supply
condition. The lower the value of K, the lower the toner density
P Pattern Cycle
2210*
Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern prints.
Job Page Count [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 sheet]
001* Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing. For users that do not make many
copies daily, set a smaller interval to compensate for the effects of seasonal and
weather changes.
Forced Page Count [2 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheet]
002* Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing.

Forces creation of the ID sensor pattern to prevent low density copies for customers
who use the copier for long copy jobs.
61
Toner End Setting
Selects the detection type for toner end.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 step]
[0: 90 copies, 1: No copies, 2: 10 copies]
2213*
• 90 copies: Toner end is determined if a low density image (Vref < Vt(10)) is
detected 90 times after toner near end.
• If "1" is selected, the machine stops printing when the TD sensor output drops
below the prescribed level.
• Select 1 or 2 if the customer normally makes copies of very high density.
Vref Setting
Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). Change this value after replacing the
development unit with another development unit that contains toner.
[1 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 ]
2220* 1. Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit and the
machine that you are going to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit into
SP2-220.
3. After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220 back to
the original value.
Reverse Interval Drum,Transfer [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheets]
2221* Adjusts the threshold for the reverse rotation of the drum and development/transfer
motors. This helps the drum and transfer belt cleaning operations. This reverse rotation
will interrupt a multiple printing job.
2223* Vt Display
Current [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01]
001
Displays the TD sensor output voltage for the immediately previous copy.
Average 10 copies [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01]

002 Displays the average of the most recent TD sensor outputs (from the previous 10
copies).
62
Engine SP Tables-2
Rate of Change [-10000 to 10000 / 0 / 1]

003
Displays the rate of change in the TD sensor output.
GAIN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004
Displays the GAIN value used to calculate the on time for the toner supply motor.
Image Pixel Count [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

005
Displays the image pixel count.
Developer Lot
2228* Displays the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the top edge
of the developer pack.)
Transfer Current Adjustment
2301* If the transfer current of image area is set highly than normal, the print image is easily
come out. If the leading transfer current is set as same, the black line is come out due to
exfoliation leave.
Image Area: 1st Side [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper
Image Area: 2nd Side [10 to 100 / 40 / 1 A]

002
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the second side of the paper
Leading Edge: 1st Side [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
003 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the first side of the paper.
Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and
high temperature conditions.
Leading Edge: 2nd Side [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
004 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the second side of the paper.
63
By-pass: Image Area [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A]
005 Adjusts the transfer current for copying from the by-pass tray.
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the bypass tray, use a higher setting.
By-pass: Leading Edge [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A ]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper fed from the by-
006 pass tray.
No Image Area (SSP) [10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A ]

008
Adjusts the transfer current for copying.
2309* Current: Paper Size Correction (SSP)
Paper Lower Width (a) [1 to 150 / 150 / 1 mm ]
Adjusts the lower paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge voltage, and
001 development bias corrections.
Use this SP when an image problem (e.g., insufficient toner transfer) occurs with a small
width paper. If the paper width is smaller than this value, the transfer current will be
multiplied by the factor in SP2-309-3 (paper tray) or SP2-309-5 (by-pass).
Paper Upper Width (a) [151 to 296 / 216 / 1 mm ]
Adjusts the upper paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge voltage, and
002 development bias corrections.
As for SP2-309-1, but the factors are in SP2-309-4 (paper tray) and SP2-309-6 (by-
pass).
Paper Tray: Plain (alpha) [1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]

003 Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less than the
setting of SP2-309-1.
Paper Tray: Plain (beta) [1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]

64
Engine SP Tables-2
By-pass: Plain (gamma) [1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]

By-pass: Plain (delta) [1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]

007 Paper Tray: Thick 1 (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
008 Paper Tray: Thick 1 (beta)
009 By-pass: Thick 1 (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
010 By-pass: Thick 1 (delta)
011 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
012 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (beta)
013 By-pass: Thick 2 (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.5 / 0.1 ]
014 By-pass: Thick 2 (delta)
015 Paper Tray: M-Thick (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
016 Paper Tray: M-Thick (beta)
017 By-pass: M-Thick (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
018 By-pass: M-Thick (delta)
019 Paper Tray: Thin (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
020 Paper Tray: Thin (beta)
021 By-pass: Thin (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
022 By-pass: Thin (delta)
023 Paper Tray: Special 1 (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
024 Paper Tray: Special 1 (beta)
025 By-pass: Special 1 (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
026 By-pass: Special 1 (delta)
65

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
Current: Paper Type Correction (SSP)
2310* Adjusts the transfer current for each paper type. If the transfer current of the image
area is set higher than normal, the print image easily comes out. If the leading edge
transfer current is set the same, black lines come out.
Image 1st Side: Thick 1 [10 to 100 / 18 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the transfer current for the first side of the paper (Thick 1).
Leading Edge 1st Side: Thick 1 [10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A]
002 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of the first side of the paper. Increase
the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and high
temperature conditions (Thick 1).
Image 2nd Side: Thick 1 [10 to 100 / 18 / 1 A]

003
Adjusts the transfer current for the second side of the paper (Thick 1).
Leading Edge 2nd Side: Thick 1 [10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A]
004 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of the second side of the paper (Thick
1). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity
and high temperature conditions.
Image: Thick 2 [10 to 100 / 18 / 1 A]

005
Adjusts the transfer current (Thick 2).
66
Engine SP Tables-2
Leading Edge: Thick 2 [10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A]
006 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of paper (Thick 2). Increase the current
to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and high temperature
conditions.
Image: OHP [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]

007
Adjusts the transfer current (OHP).
Leading Edge: OHP [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
008 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of paper (OHP). Increase the current
to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and high temperature
conditions.
Image: Envelope [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]

009
Adjusts the transfer current (Envelopes).
Leading Edge: Envelope [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
010 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of paper (Envelopes). Increase the
current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and high
temperature conditions.
Image 1st Side: M-Thick [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]

011
Adjusts the transfer current for the first side of the paper (M-Thick).
Leading Edge 1st Side: M-Thick [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
012 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of the first side of the paper (M-Thick).
Image 2nd Side: M-Thick [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]

013
Adjusts the transfer current for the second side of the paper (M-Thick).
Leading Edge 2nd Side: M-Thick [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
014 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of the second side of the paper (M-
Thick). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high
humidity and high temperature conditions.
Image 1st Side: Special 1 [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A]

015
Adjusts the transfer current for the first side of the paper (Special 1).
67
Leading Edge 1st Side: Special 1 [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
016 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of the first side of the paper (Special
Image 2nd Side: Special 1 [10 to 100 / 40 / 1 A]

017
Adjusts the transfer current for the second side of the paper (Special 1).
Leading Edge 2nd Side: Special 1 [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
018 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of the second side of the paper
(Special 1). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high

019
Leading Edge 1st Side: Special 2 [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]

021

023
Leading Edge 1st Side: Special 3 10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]

025
68
Engine SP Tables-2
PTL Control (SSP)
Use this SP when an image problem occurs caused by the pick-off pawls. This SP is for
2602* line speeds of 230 or 180 mm/s. Set PTL control (SP2603-001) to “1: ON” after
installing the PTL. If PTL control is set to ON, black lines come out. Set SP2911-002 (or
005, 008, 011) to “20” when using the PTL.
1st Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

001
Sets the PTL control setting for printing the first side of the paper.
1st Side: OFF Timing [-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]

002 Sets the PTL control time for printing the first side of the paper when SP2602-001 is set
to “1”.
2nd Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

003
Sets the PTL control setting for printing the second side of the paper.
2nd Side: OFF Timing [-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]

004 Sets the PTL control time for printing the second side of the paper when SP2602-003 is
set to “1”.
PTL Control: 154 mm/s (SSP)
2603* the line speed of 154 mm/s. Set PTL control (SP2603-001) to “1: ON” after installing
the PTL. If the PTL control is set to ON, black lines come out. Set SP2911-002 (or 005,
008, 011) to “20” when using the PTL.
1st Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

001

to “1”.
69
2nd Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

003

set to “1”.
PTL Control: 90 mm/s (SSP)
2604* the line speed of 90 mm/s. Set PTL control (SP2603-001) to “1: ON” after installing
the PTL. If the PTL control is set to ON, black lines come out. Set SP2911-002 (or 005,
008, 011) to “20” when using the PTL.
1st Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

001

to “1”.
2nd Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

003

set to “1”.
TD Sensor Initial Setting Initialization
Performs the TD sensor initial setting and allows the service technician to enter the lot
number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the edge of the developer
2801* package.) This SP mode controls the voltage applied to the TD sensor to make the TD
sensor output about 3.0 V. Press "Execute" to start. After finishing this, the TD sensor
output voltage is displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the machine, changing the TD sensor, or adding
new developer.
70
Engine SP Tables-2
TD Sensor Manual Setting

2802*
Allows you to adjust the TD sensor output manually for the following.
VTS [1 to 5 / 4.78 / 0.01vol ]
Adjusts the TD sensor output (VT).

001
Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that already
contains toner. For example, when using a development unit from another machine for
test purposes. To adjust VT, use a similar procedure as for SP2-220.
VTMAX [1 to 5 / 4.78 / 0.01vol ]

002
Adjusts the maximum value for SP2802 1.
VTMIN [1 to 5 / 1 / 0.01vol ]
003
Adjusts the minimum value for SP2802 1.
Process Setting
2805 Performs the developer initialization. Press "Execute" to start. This SP should be
performed after doing SP2801 at installation and after replacing the drum.
Grayscale Setting
2810
Initializes the LD power setting. This SP should be done after replacing the drum.
2812* Drum Reverse Rotation (SSP)
Reverse time [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 ]
001
Sets the reverse time of the drum motor after the end of a job.
Interval time [0 to 19 / 9 /1 ]
002
Sets the waiting time of the drum motor reverse after the end of a job.
2911* Transfer Current On/Off Timing (SSP)
La (On Timing) [-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm]

001
Adjust the timing to turn on the transfer current for the leading edge.
71
Lb (Switch Timing) [0 to 30 / 10 / 1 mm]

002
Adjust the timing to switch transfer current from the leading edge to the image area.
Lc (Off Timing) [-20 to 20 / -5 / 1 mm]

003
Adjust the timing to turn off the transfer current for the image area.
La (On Timing): Special 1 [-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm]

004
Adjust the timing to turn on the transfer current for the leading edge (Special 1).
Lb (Switch Timing): Special 1 [0 to 30 / 10 / 1 mm]

005 Adjust the timing to switch transfer current from the leading edge to the image area
(Special 1).
Lc (Off Timing): Special 1 [-20 to 20 / -5 / 1 mm]

006
Adjust the timing to turn off the transfer current for the image area (Special 1).

007

(Special 2).

009

010

(Special 2).

012
2912* Transfer Reverse Rotation
72
Engine SP Tables-2
Interval [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 ]
002
Sets the reverse time of the transfer/development motor after the end of a job.
2914* Paper Setting
C-alpha [0 to 400 / 150 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from the
by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value
001 of SP2-309-1.
Use this SP when an image problem (such as white spots at the center of black dots or
breaks in thin black lines) occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass
feed tray.
C-beta [0 to 400 / 0 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from the
002 by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value
of SP2-309-2.
Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with a small
width is fed from the by-pass feed tray.
B-gamma [0 to 300 / 200 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-
003 pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of
SP2-309-1.
B-delta [0 to 300 / 50 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-
004 pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of
SP2-309-2.
2940* Toner consump. (SSP)
73
[0: OFF 1: ON] [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]

001 If this SP is set to ON, the toner bottle consumes toner when SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial
Setting) is executed. This prevents image offset.
Setting [0 to 1 / 0.06 / 0.01]

002 Specifies the threshold value for the toner consumption mode if SP2940-001 is set to
ON.
Toner Overflow Sensor [0 = OFF, 1= ON]

2960*
Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated.
Trans Cleaning Blade Forming (SSP)
Applies a pattern of toner to the transfer belt at a defined interval between sheets on
the transfer belt in order to reduce friction between the belt surface and the cleaning
blade.
2964*
Under conditions of high temperature and high humidity, the density control feature
may reduce the amount of toner, which also reduces the amount of toner on the
surface of the transfer belt. With less toner on the belt, the friction between the belt and
the blade increases, and could cause the blade to bend or scour the surface of the
belt.
001 0: OFF, 1: ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Pattern Interval [1 to 100 / 15 / 1 sheet]
003 Pattern Number [1 to 3 / 1 / 1 line]
004 Pattern LD Power [0 to 15 / 2 / 1 ]
Grayscale Limit (SSP)
2972* Controls the halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the OPC. The halftone
density is detected by the ID sensor, and the machine adjusts the intensity of the LD
beam according to the upper/lower limit setting.
74
Engine SP Tables-2
Upper Limit [0 to 100 / 63 / 1vol ]
Defines the upper limit for grayscale.

001
A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale. If the
image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark areas, reduce this
value to make the borders clearer.
Lower Limit [0 to 100 / 57 / 1vol ]
002 Defines the lower limit for grayscale.
A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the scale.
Grayscale Cycle (SSP) [0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 sheets ]
2973* Set s the halftone operation interval in order to prevent deterioration of the OPC. If the
number of copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or if the door is opened
and closed, charge correction is executed.
2974* Image Density
Adjustment Mode [1 to 5 / 3 / 1 ]
001 Adjusts image density. Changing this setting adjusts development bias and ID sensor
output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density.
Near End Setting
Detection Time [0 to 2000 / 0 / 10 sec ]
2975* Sets a time for toner supply motor rotation for issuing the toner near end warning on
the operation panel. The time may need to be shorter for customers who run especially
large print jobs (working at night, for example) to ensure earlier warning of the toner
near end condition so toner out does not interrupt a long job.
75
Bottle Motor Time
Displays the total ON time of the toner supply motor, calculated from when the toner
bottle was replaced. Use this to check that the toner end count (SP2975) is working
properly.
2976*
When SP2975 is set to any value other than "0", this value is displayed when it
matches the setting of SP2975. When SP2975 is set to "0", SP2976 is disabled.
SP2976 is automatically set to zero by toner end recovery.)
Time [0 to 7,000,000 / 0 / 1 msec]
Toner End Status

2977*
Indicates the toner near end or end condition.
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not detected
1: Detected by SP2975-001
001 Near End 2: Vt (10) - Vref > 0.2 and Vsp > 0.6
3: Vt (10) - Vref > 0.45
4: 0.45 > Vt (10) - Vref > 0.2 and toner end counter > 300
5 to 10: Not used
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not detected
1: Vsp > 2.0
2: Toner end counter > 90 when SP2213-001 is set to "0".
3: Toner end counter < 90 and Vt (10) > (Vref + 0.3) when
002 End
SP2213-001 is set to "0".
4: When SP2213-001 is set to "2"
5: Vsp > 0.9 when SP2213-001 is set to "2"
6: Special order
7 to 10: Not used
76
Engine SP Tables-2
Charge Counter [0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 sheets ]
Set the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before the charge
input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in the polarity of the
2980* carrier.
The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually decrease and
cause lower charge output. Setting the charge output to increase after a specified
number of copies can compensate for this effect.
77
Engine SP Tables-3
SP3-xxx: Process
3001 P Sensor Setting
Current [0 to 43 / 13 / 0.1 mA ]
001* Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor LED to avoid a service call error after
clearing NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM.
The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2.
Initialization -
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor output for the bare drum (VSG) is
002 adjusted automatically to 4.0 ±0.2 V.
Press "Execute" to start. Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the ID sensor,
replacing the drum, or clearing NVRAM.
3045* Toner End Setting DFU
001 ON/OFF [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=Off, 1=On
P Sensor Output
Displays the current VSG, VSP, VSDP, and grayscale control.

3103* If the P sensor does not detect the P pattern, "VSP = 5.0 V/VSG = 5.0 V" is displayed
and an SC code is generated.
If the P sensor does not detect the bare area of the drum, "VSP = 0.0 V/VSG =0.0 V" is
displayed and an SC code is generated.
001 Vsg [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
002 Vsp [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
003 Vsdp [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
004 Vsm/Vsg [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
3902* New PCU Detection (Not used)
78
Engine SP Tables-3
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
ON/OFF Setting
001 0: On, 1: Off
Turns on or off the new unit detection for the transfer belt unit and fusing unit.
Hot Roller Stripper Cleaning
3905* "Cleaning A": 15 sec. off/on cycle for the fusing motor.
"Cleaning B": Off (45 sec.) and On (15 sec.) cycle for the fusing motor.
1st Cleaning: Interval
Sets the threshold for the 1st cleaning mode.

001
"Cleaning A" is done once.
[0 to 5 / 5 / 1 sheets]
1st Cleaning: Mode Setting
002 Sets the number of additional execution times of the 1st cleaning mode.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
2nd Cleaning: Interval
Sets the threshold for the 2nd cleaning mode.

003
"Cleaning A" is done twice.
[6 to 49 / 30 / 1 sheets]
2nd Cleaning: Mode Setting
004 Sets the number of additional execution times of the 2nd cleaning mode.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
3rd Cleaning: Interval
Sets the threshold for the 3rd cleaning mode.

005 "Cleaning A" is done twice and "Cleaning B" is done "N" times.
"N" is specified with SP3905-006.

[50 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheets]
79
3rd Cleaning: Mode Setting
Sets the number of execution times of the 3rd cleaning mode.

[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
006
• All fans remain on during cleaning and then switch off 60sec after the cleaning
cycle ends.
Cleaning Priority Setting
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 sheets]
007
0: Priority to printing (No job interruption)
1: Priority to cleaning (Job interruption)
80
Engine SP Tables-4
Engine SP Tables-4
SP4-xxx: Scanner
There are no Group 4 SP modes for this machine.
81
Engine SP Tables-5
SP5-xxx: Mode
5009* Add Disp. Lang Bit SW
Adds language available in user choice. (Only the languages registered in the
machine)
Refer to the displayed language list to set in the way showed below.
List Num. Assigned Bit Switch
No.1~8 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-201)
201,202,2 No.9~16 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-202)

03,204
No.17~24 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-203)
No.25~32 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-204)
Example: To add American(No.3 in the list) or Czech (No.15)

Turn Bit 3 of “SP5009-201” 0 to 1 for American.
Turn Bit 7 of “SP5009-202” 0 to 1 for Czech.
After setting, turn the main power switch off and on to make the setting valid.
0: Europe/Asia (mm)
mm/inch Display Selection
1: North America (inch)
5024*
Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
Accounting counter
Selects whether the printer counter is displayed on the LCD.

5045* [0-1 / 0 / 1]
0: Displays the total counter only.
1: Displays both total counter and printer counter.
5047* Paper Display
82
Engine SP Tables-5
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5056* Coverage Counter Display
Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5061* Toner Remaining Icon Display Change
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not display, 1: Display
Home Screen Login

5074*
Sets the application that appears when the home key is pressed.
Setting
002 [0 to 11111111 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Home Key Customization
091 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
0: OFF (Function disabled), 1: SDK, 2: Reserve (Legacy application)
Product ID
092 Sets the Application product ID.
[0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1]
Application Screen ID
093 Sets the display category of the application that is specified in SP5075-001.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
5075* USB Keyboard
83
Function Setting
001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
5083* LED ON-OFF setting at Toner Near End
Turns LED yellow lighting ON and OFF at Toner Near End.

001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5104* A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except from the
bypass tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4
x2 and LT x2 respectively.
5112* Non-Std. Paper Sel.
Non-Standard Paper Selection

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not use, 1: Use
Paper Size Type Selection
Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper.
5131* [0 to 2 / - / 1 step]
0: Japan, 1: North America, 2: Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the archive
files stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result.
Bypass Length Setting
Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5150
0: Off [Default]
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
84
Engine SP Tables-5
5166* Lump Delete Form Setting
Last Deleted Time
021 Displays the last delete time.
[0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
By-pass Tray Paper Size Error [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON

5179* This SP determines whether a paper size error prompt appears when the machine
detects the wrong paper size for the job and during feed from the by-pass tray.
Paper Size Setting

5181*
Adjusts the paper size for each tray. [0 to 1 / - / 1]
001 Tray 1: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
002 Tray 1: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
003 Tray 1: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
005 Tray 2: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
006 Tray 2: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
007 Tray 2: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
009 Tray 3: 1 (Tandem) 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
010 Tray 3: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
011 Tray 3: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
013 Tray 4: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
014 Tray 4: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
015 Tray 4: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
85
017 LCT [0 to 2 / - / 1 ] 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF
RK4: Setting (Japan only)
Enable or distance the prevention for RK4 (Accounting device) Disconnection. If the
5186 RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine
automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Paper Exit After Staple End
This SP determines whether the machine can output paper if staples run out.
5199 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF. Paper cannot exit if no staples are available.
1: ON. Paper can exit with no staples.
5302* Set Time
Time Difference
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before delivery.
The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440 to 1440 / - / 1 min.]
Japan: +540 (Tokyo)
002 NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
KO: +540 (Korea)
5305-101
RTB 5a
5307 Summer Time
86
Engine SP Tables-5
[0 to 1 / 1 (NA/EU), 0 (ASIA) / 1 /step]

Setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
001 Enables or disables the summer time mode.
• Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not
activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Rule Set (Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit,
so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
003
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March.
Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
004
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
87
Access Control (DFU)

5401
This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data.
Whenever a new login user is added to the

address book in external certification mode
(for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the default
document ACL is updated according to this SP
setting.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
103 Default Document ACL 0: View
1: Edit
2: Edit/Delete
3: Full control
Note: This SP setting is ignored on a machine
that is not using document server.
Specifies the timeout of the authentication.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec./step]
104 Authentication Time
0: 60 seconds
1 to 250 seconds
Selects the log out type for the extend

authentication device.
162 Extend Certification Detail Bit 0: Log-out without an IC card
0: Not allowed (default)
1: Allowed
200 SDK1 Unique ID
201 SDK1 Certification Method
210 SDK2 Unique ID

"SDK" is the "Software Development Kit". This
211 SDK2 Certification Method data can be converted from SAS (VAS) when
installed or uninstalled. (DFU)
220 SDK3 Unique ID
221 SDK3 Certification Method
230 SDK certification device
88
Engine SP Tables-5
Enables or disables the log out confirmation

option.
Bit 0: Log out confirmation option
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
240 Detail Option
Selects the automatic log out time.
Bit 1 and 2: Automatic log out timer reduction
00: 60 seconds (default), 01: 10 seconds,
10: 20 seconds, 11: 30 seconds
Access Control (DFU)

5402
Sets limited uses for SDKJ application data.
[ / 0x00 / 0x01/step]
bit0: SDKJ Authentication
-0: Panel Type
-1: Remote Type
bit1: Using user code setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
bit2: Using key-counter setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
SDKJ1 Limit Setting….. SDKJ30 Limit bit3: Using billing external device setup
101 to 130
Setting -0: OFF, 1: ON
bit3: Using external billing device setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
bit4: Using extended external billing device
setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
bit5~6: Not used
bit7: Using extended function J limit users
-0: OFF, 1: ON
SDKJ1 Product ID….. SDKJ30 Product

141 to 170 [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1/step]
ID
89
User Code Count Clear

5404 Clears the counts of the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of
the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5411 LDAP-Certification
Turns simple authentication on or off for LDAP.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
004 Simplified Certification
0: OFF
1: ON
This SP is enabled only when SP5411-4 is set

to "1" (ON).
005 Password Null Not Permit [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Password null is permitted.
1: Password null is not permitted.
Determines whether LDAP option (anonymous

certification) is turned on or off.
006 Detail Option
[0 or 11111111 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5412 Krb-Certification
Sets the level of Kerberos Certification.

[0x01:AES256-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 /
100 Encrypt Mode 0x02:AES128-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 /
0x04:DES3-CBC-SHA / 0x08:RC4-HMAC /
0x10:DES-CBC-MD5 / 0xFF:ALL / 0xFF /
1bit]
5413 Lockout Setting
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Lockout On/Off
001 0: OFF, 1:ON
Turns on or off the account lock for the local address book account.
90
Engine SP Tables-5
Lockout Threshold [1 to 10 / 5 / 1/step]

002
Sets the maximum trial times for accessing the address book account.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF (Lockout is not cancelled.)
Cancellation On/Off 1: ON (Lockout is cancelled if a user ID and

003 password are correctly entered after the
lockout function has been executed and a
specific time has passed.)
Turns on or off the cancellation function of the account lockout.
Cancellation Time [1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min]
004 Sets the interval of the retry for accessing the local address book account after the
lockout function has been executed.
This setting is enabled only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (ON).
5414 Access Mitigation
Mitigation ON/OFF
Permits or does not permit consecutive access to the machine with the same ID and
password.
001
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF (Permitted)
1: ON (Not permitted)
Mitigation Time
002 Sets the prohibiting time for consecutive access to the machine with the same ID and
password.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min]
5415 Password Attack
Permissible Number [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 times]

001 Sets the threshold number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to
gain illegal access to the system.
91
Detect Time [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]

002
Sets a detection time to count a password attack.
5416 Access Information
Access User Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1/step ]

001 Sets the number of users for the access exclusion and password attack detection
function.
Access Password Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1/step ]

002 Sets the number of passwords for the access exclusion and password attack detection
function.
Monitor interval [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]

003
Sets the interval of watching out for user information and passwords.
5417 Access Attack
Access Permissible number [0 to 500 / 100 / 1/step]

001
Sets a limit on access attempts to prevent password cracking.
Access Detect Time [10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]

002
Sets a detection time to count password cracking.
Productivity Fall Weight [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec]

003 Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive number of
access attempts have been detected.
Attack Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1/step]
004 Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down
the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been
detected.
92
Engine SP Tables-5
User Authentication
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

5420
• These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1/step] 0: ON. 1: OFF

041 Printer Determines whether certification is required
before a user can use the printer application.
051 SDK1
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1/step] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2 Determines whether certification is required
before a user can use the SDK application.
071 SDK3
5430 Auth Dialog Message Change
Turns on or off the displayed message change

for the authentication.
001 Message Change On/Off
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Off, 1: On
Executes the message download for the

002 Message Text Download
authentication.
003 Message Text ID Inputs message text for the authentication.
Authentication Error Code

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF [Default], 1: ON
001 System Log Disp Determines whether an error code appears in
the system log after a user authentication
failure occurs.
93
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON [Default]
002 Panel Disp Determines whether an error code appears on
the operation panel after a user authentication
failure occurs.
5501* PM Alarm
PM Alarm Level
Sets the PM alarm level.

001
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
0: No PM alarm
Original Count Alarm (DFU)
Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not.
002
If this is "1", the PM alarm function is enabled.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Jam Alarm
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step]
5504*
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
Error Alarm
Sets the number of sheets to clear the error alarm counter.

The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm
5505* counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied
sheets (for example, default 5000 (C1b) or 10000 (C1c) sheets). The error alarm
occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / 60 / 100 copies / step]
94
Engine SP Tables-5
5507* Supply Alarm
Switches the control call on/off for the paper

supply. (DFU)
0: Off, 1: On
Paper supply Alarm
001 0: No alarm.
(0:Off 1:On)
1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified
number transfer sheets for each paper size
(A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT, HLT)
Switches the control call on/off for the stapler

installed in the finisher. (DFU)
Staple Supply Alarm
002 0: Off, 1: On
(0:Off 1:On)
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
Switches the control call on/off for the toner

end. (DFU)
Toner Supply Alarm
003 0: Off, 1: On
(0:Off 1:On)
If you select "1" the alarm will sound when the
copier detects toner end.
006 Waste Toner Bottle Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call"

via the @Remote, when the following
080 Toner Call Timing conditions occur.
0: At replacement
1: At near end
95
128 Interval: Others
132 Interval: A3
134 Interval: A5
141 Interval: B4 The "Paper Supply Call Level: nn" SPs specify
the paper control call interval for the
142 Interval: B5 referenced paper sizes. (DFU)
160 Interval: DLT [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
164 Interval: LG
166 Interval: LT
172 Interval: HLT
5508 CC Call
001 Jam Remains Enables/disables initiating a call.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 Continuous Jams
0: Disable
003 Continuous Door Open 1: Enable
Sets the length of time to determine the length

011 Jam Detection: Time Length of an unattended paper jam.
[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute]
Sets the number of continuous paper jams

Jam Detection Continuous
012 required to initiate a call.
Count
[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 time]
Sets the length of time the remains opens to

013 Door Open: Time Length determine when to initiate a call.
[3 to 30/ 10 / 1 minute]
SC/Alarm Setting
5515* With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error
occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
96
Engine SP Tables-5
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call
003 Service Parts End Call
004 User Call
006 Communication Information Test Call

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
007 Machine Information Notice 0: OFF
1: ON
008 Alarm Notice
009 Non-genuine Toner Alarm
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
Individual PM Part Alarm Call

5516 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call when one of
SP parts reaches its yield.
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not send, [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

001
1: Send) 0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
Extend Function Setting

5730
Expiration Prior Alarm Set [0 to 999 / 20 / 1/step]
[Counter Effect]
5731
Charge MK1 Cnt (Paper >Combine) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
EcoCountTime
5745
- [0 to 1439 / 0 / -/step]
5746 BMLinkS (Japan only)
97
Displays or enables the BMLinkS feature.

001 available
[0 or 1 / 1 / -/step]
Displays the polling interval when the

BMLinsS monitor service monitors the
002 interval:mon
machine status.
[10 to 3600 / 60 / 1 sec./step]
Displays the sending feature status of the

BMLinkS log service.
004 Available:log
[0 or 1 / 1 / -/step ]
SP5749
Input/Output
RTB 15
5749
DFU
Job Access Log
Changes the capacity of log storage.
5750 SP7-750-001 Job Log Access Log Eco Log
0:OFF (Default) 2000 6000 2000
1:ON 8000 1000 1000
Memory Clear
5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP codes,
print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 19 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy

002 Engine
process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control

003 SCS Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM
update information.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer

008 Printer Application
SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
98
Engine SP Tables-5
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails,

and initializes the Job login ID.
010 Web Service
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a
PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP

addresses also), the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin settings,
011 NCS WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
015 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)

016 MIRS Setting
settings.
018 SRM Memory Clr Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
019 LCS Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
FreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.

5802*
The correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is not fed.
The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a test.
001 TRAY1:A4LEF -
002 TRAY2:A3 -
003 TRAY2:A4SEF -
Input Check
5803
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches. ( p.181)
Output Check
5804
Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes. ( p.190)
99
Anti-Condensation Heater
5805 [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0:OFF / 1:ON
5810 SC Reset
Resets all level A service call conditions, such as fusing errors.

001 Fusing SC Reset To clear the service call, touch "Execute" on the LCD, then
turn the main power switch off/on.
5811 MachineSerial
002 Display Displays the machine serial number.
004 BCU Inputs the serial number.
5812* Service Tel. No. Setting
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a service call

001 Service
condition occurs.)
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the Counter Report
002 Facsimile
(UP mode).
Inputs the telephone number of the supplier displayed on the user

003 Supply
mode screen.
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be displayed on

004 Operation
the user mode screen.
Allows the inquiry display to be displayed on the user mode screen.

101 DispInquiry 0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
5816 Remote Service
100
Engine SP Tables-5
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
001
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
002
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.

003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registration has been completed.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification

1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
101
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.

011
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
RFU (Remote Firmware Update) Timing
Selects the RFU timing.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.

1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG Error Cause
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
014 0: Normal
1: Fails to reflect the client/server certificate settings by network failure to reboot.

Transitions to 0 on restarting the machine.
RCG–C Registed
This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.

021
0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert. Expire Timing DFU

061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
102
Engine SP Tables-5
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates
with the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded
RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server
address. The address is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
063
• The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond the 128
character are ignored.
• This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between
Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up Embedded
064
RC Gate-N.
• This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
• The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066
• The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the
31st character is ignored.
103
CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW
1
URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
2
successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed
3
update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being
4
sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting
11
is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
067 The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of
12
the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully,
13 and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW
URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW
14
controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the
15
successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
16
failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW URL
17 was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but a certification
error has been received, and the rescue certification is being recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being
18
notified of the failure of the certification update.
104
Engine SP Tables-5
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the
certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired.
068
2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT: Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the

previous version of the firmware before the firmware
update execution. If the option to confirm the previous
085 Firm Up User Check
version is selected, a notification is sent to the system
manager and the firmware update is done with the
firmware files from the URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the

086 Firmware Size
firmware data files during the firmware update execution.
087 CERT: Macro Ver. Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification.
088 CERT: PAC Ver. Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces are

displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (*) indicate that
089 CERT: ID2 Code
Displays the common name of the @Remote certification

subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are
090 CERT: Subject displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that no
@Remote certification exists. "000000___________"
105
Displays serial number for the @Remote certification.

091 CERT: SerialNo.
Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote

092 CERT: Issuer certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes ()
indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the current
093 CERT: Valid Start
Displays the end time of the period for which the current
094 CERT: Valid End
Server CN Check
095
Not used
GW Host
096
Not used
GW URL Path
097
Not used
Debug RescueG/WURL Set

099
Not used
102* CERT: Encrypt Level
Displays the encryption level for the NRS certificate.

[1 or 2 / 1 / – ]
Manual Polling
200
Executes the manual polling.
106
Engine SP Tables-5
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
201 status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device cannot
communicate with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
Allows entry of the request number needed for the

202 Letter Number
Embedded RCG Gate.
203 Confirm Execute Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote Gateway.
204 Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in answer to the
confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the Gateway.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
107
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

8: Other error
9: Registration executing
108
Engine SP Tables-5
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring

-12002
device status.
Attempted registration without execution of an

-12003
inquiry and no previous registration.
208 Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited. The

-12005 device has an Embedded RC gate-related
problem.
Operation Error, Incorrect
Setting A confirmation request was made after the
-12006
confirmation had been already completed.
The request number used at registration was

-12007
different from the one used at confirmation.
Update certification failed because mainframe

-12008
was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual certification

-12009
and NVRAM
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.
109
Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

-2385
international prefix for the telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
Error Caused by -2389 Database out of service

Response from GW URL
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 RCG device not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate setup.

209 Instl Clear NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after this
setting has been changed.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
5821* Remote Service Address
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication

002 RCG IP Address center.
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1]
Sets the port number of the RCG (Remote Communication

003 RCG Port center.
[0 to 65535 / 443 / 1]
110
Engine SP Tables-5
Sets the URL path of the RCG (Remote Communication

004 RCG URL Path center.
[0 to 16 characters / /RCG/services/ /-]
NV-RAM Data Upload
5824 Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card. Push Execute.

Note: When uploading data in this SP mode, the front door must be open.
NV-RAM Data Download

5825 Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After downloading is
completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off and on.
5828 Network Setting
IPv4 Address (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)

001 This SP allows you to check and reset the IPv4 address for Ethernet and wireless LAN
(802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Enables and disables bi-directional communication on

the parallel connection between the machine and a
050 1284 Compatibility (Centro) computer.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
0:Off, 1: On
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode)

for data transfer.
052 ECP (Centro)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Switches the job spooling on and off.

065 Job Spooling [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
111
This SP determines whether the job interrupted at

power off is resumed at the next power on. This SP
operates only when SP5828-065 is set to "1".
Job Spooling Clear: Start
066 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Time
1: OFF Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: ON Clears spooled job.
This SP determines whether job spooling is enabled or

disabled for each protocol. This is a 8-bit setting.
Job Spooling (Protocol)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
069 0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT
2 IPP 6 SFTP
3 SMB 7 WSPRND
Delete Passward
084
Executes NCS related parameter list printing
087 @Remote Protocol Cnt (DFU)
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is

TELNET disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
090
(0:OFF 1:ON) [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Disables or enables the Web operation.

Web
091 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
(0:OFF 1:ON)
This is the IPv6 local address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11) in the format: "Link-
Local address" + "Prefix Length"
Active IPv6 Link Local
145 The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
Address
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. These notations can be
abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses " below this
table.
112
Engine SP Tables-5

147
1

149 These SPs are the IPv6 stateless addresses (1 to 5)
2
referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11) in
Active IPv6 Stateless Address the format:
151
3 "Stateless Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
153 in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
4

155
5
IPv6 Manual Address
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
(802.11) in the format:
156
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses" below this table.
IPv6 Gateway Address
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
158 (802.11). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16
bits each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses" below this
table.
Note: IPV6 Addresses

Ethernet and the Wireless LAN (802.11) reference the IPV6 "Link-Local address + Prefix Length". The
IPV6 address consists of 128 bits divided into 8 blocks of 16 bits:
aaaa:bbbb:cccc:dddd:eeee:ffff:gggg:hhhh:
The prefix length is inserted at the 17th byte (Prefix Range: 0x0 to 0x80). The initial setting is 0x40
(64).
For example, the data: "2001123456789012abcdef012345678940h" is expressed:
"2001:1234:5678:9012:abcd:ef01:2345:6789": prefixlen 64
However, the actual IPV6 address display is abbreviated according to the following rules.
113
Rules for Abbreviating IPV6 Addresses

1. The IPV6 address is expressed in hexadecimal delimited by colons (:) with the following
characters:
0123456789abcdefABCDEF
2. A colon is inserted as a delimiter every 4th hexadecimal character.
fe80:0000:0000:0000:0207:40ff:0000:340e
3. The notations can be abbreviated by eliminating zeros where the MSB and digits following the
MSB are zero. The example in "2" above, then, becomes
fe80:0:0:0207:40ff:0:340e
4. Sections where only zeros exist can be abbreviated with double colons (::). This abbreviation
can be done also where succeeding sections contain only zeros (but this can be done only at
one point in the address). The example in "2" and "3" above then becomes:
fe80::207:40ff:0:340e (only the first null sets zero digits are abbreviated as "::")
-or-
fe80:0:0:0:207:40ff::340e (only the last null set before "340e" is abbreviated as "::")
Enable or disables the automatic setting for IPv6

stateless.
161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
1: Enable, 0: Disable
Web Item visible
Displays or does not display the Web system items.

[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
236
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Web shopping link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of
237 the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
114
Engine SP Tables-5
Web supplies Link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top page and link
238 page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Web Link1 Name

239 This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web system. The
maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
Web Link1 URL

240 his SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web system. The
maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Web Link1 visible
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web system.
241
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
DHCPv6 DUID
Sets DHCPv6 DUID.

249
[0000000000000000000000000000h to
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh / 0000000000000000000000000000h / -]
UUID
251
DFU
Compatible ID
252 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0= Disabled , 1= Enabled
115
HDD
5832 Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the execution
ends, cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
009 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder)
Operation Panel Image Exposure Function

5834
DFU
5840* IEEE 802.11
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth setting
006 varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 11 (NA), 13 (EU), 14 (JPN) / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This
007 bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
116
Engine SP Tables-5
Transmission speed [0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix 0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix 0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
008 0 x 0F - 36M Fix 0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix 0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 0D - 12M Fix 0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
0 x 0B - 9M Fix 0 x 09 - 22M (reserved)
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
WEP Key Select
Selects the WEP key.

Bit 1 and 0
011
00: Key1, 01: Key2 (Reserved),
10: Key3 (Reserved), 11: Key4(Reserved)
RTS/CTS Thresh
Adjusts the RTS/CTS threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.

013
[0 to 3000 / 2432 / 1]
Fragment Thresh
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.

042
[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
11g CTS to Self
Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.

043
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
117
11g Slot Time
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

044
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
WPA Debug Lvl
Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application.

045
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
Supply Name Setting

5841* Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry button
on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
007 OrgStamp
011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2
013 StapleStd3
014 StapleStd4
021 StapleBind1
022 StapleBind2
023 StapleBind3
118
Engine SP Tables-5
GWWS Analysis (DFU)
Bit Groups
0 System & other groups (LSB)
1 Capture related
This is a debugging tool. It sets
5842* the debugging output mode of 2 Certification related
each Net File process.
3 Address book related
Bit SW 0011 1111
4 Machine management related
5 Output related (printing, delivery)
6 Repository related
Default: 00000000 – do not change

001 Setting 1 Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Adjusts the debug program mode setting.

Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting
002 Setting 2 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msec.
0 to 6: Not used
5844 USB
Transfer Rate
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.

001
[0 x 01 or 0 x 04 / 0 x 04 /-]
0 x 01 [Full Speed], 0 x 04 [Auto Change]
Vendor ID
Sets the vendor ID:

002
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
119
Product ID
003 Sets the product ID.
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999 / 100 / 1] (DFU)
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number

recognized as the BCD.
005 Fixed USB Port
This SP standardizes for common use the model name and serial number for USB PnP
(Plug & Play). It determines whether the driver requires re-installation.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
006 PnP Model Name
This SP sets the model name to be used by the USB PnP when "Function Enable (Level
2) is set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name (SP5844-5).
Default: Laser Printer (up to 20 characters allowed).
007 PnP Serial Number
This SP sets the serial number to be used by the USB PnP when "Function Enable (Level
2)
set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name (SP5844-5).
Default: None (up to 12 characters allowed for entry).
• Make sure that this entry is the same as the serial number in use.
• At initialization the serial number generated from the model name is used, not the
setting of this SP code.
• At times other than initialization, the value set for this SP code is used.
100 Notify Unsupport
120
Engine SP Tables-5
This SP determines whether an alert message appears on the control panel when a
USB device (unsupported device) that cannot use an A-connector is connected.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Function enable
1: Function disable
• An unsupported device is a device that cannot use the functions of the USB
device. For example, a USB mouse cannot be used even if it connected.
• If the PictBridge option is not mounted, even if a digital camera is connected it
cannot be used because it is an unsupported device.
Delivery Server Setting

5845*
These are delivery server settings.
Delivery Retry Interval
003 [60 to 900 / 300 / 1 /step]
Sets the wait time from the error action to the retry.
Delivery Retry times
004 [0 to 99 / 3 / 1time(s) /step]
Sets how many times to retry.
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
Rapid Sending Control
022 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error.
5846* UCS Setting
LDAP Search Timeout
010 Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1 to 255 / 60 /1 step]
Initial Value of Upper Limit Count

022
[0 to 999999 / 500 / 1]
041 Fill Addr Acl Info.
121
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic

machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the
new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM
and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be
accessed only by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service
technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes successfully, any
user can access the address book.
Addr Book Media
Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.

[0 to 30 / - /1]
043
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1 20: HDD
2: SD Slot 2 30: Nothing
4: USB Flash ROM
Initialize All Setting & Addr Book

046
Initializes all settings and the address book.
Initialize Local Address Book

047 Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine
managed with UCS.
Initialize LDAP Addr Book

049 Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP address
book that is controlled by UCS.
122
Engine SP Tables-5
Initialize All Addr Book
050 Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by
UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not
deleted.
Backup All Addr Book
051 Copies all directory information to the SD card. Do this SP before replacing the
controller board or HDD. The operation may not succeed if the controller board or
HDD is damaged.
Restore All Addr Book
052 Copies back all directory information from the SD card to the flash ROM or HDD.
Upload the address book from the old flash ROM or HDD with SP5846-51 before
removing it. Do SP5846 52 after installing the new HDD.
Clear Backup Info
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot 2. Deletes only the files
053 uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not remove
the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address
book.
Bit Meaning
0 Checks both upper/lower case characters
1
060
2 Japan Only
4 --- Not Used ---
5 --- Not Used ---
6 --- Not Used ---
7 --- Not Used ---
123
Complexity Option 1
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the
password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password
policy to control access to the address book.
Complexity Option 2
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the length of the
password.
063 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Complexity Option 3
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the length of the
password.
064 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

124
Engine SP Tables-5
Complexity Option 4
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the length of the
password.
065 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Encryption Start
094 Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP server.
[0 to 255 / 1 ] No default
Web Service
5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
5848* has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848-100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
004 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits)
009 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits) Switches access control on and
off.
011 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4 Bits) 0000: OFF, 0001: ON
022 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4 Bits)

210

211
Setting: Log Type: Access

212
125
Setting: Primary Srv

213
Setting: Secondary Srv

214
Setting: Start Time

215
Setting: Interval Time

216
Setting: Timing
217
Installation Date
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to "Installation

001 Display
Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the

printout for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print [0 to 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
When the total number of pages that are made reaches this
value, the current date becomes the 'official' installation date for
003 Total Counter this machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Bluetooth
5851* Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0: Public] / [1: Private]
5856 Remote ROM Update
126
Engine SP Tables-5
When set to "1" allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284)
during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is cycled
off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable
002 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
5857 Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature
001 is switched on.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event
002 selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2 to 3 / 2 / 1]
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Save to HDD
005
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
006
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the
009 SD Card.
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by
one to each SD Card.
127
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD
Card.
010
Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no
key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data

011
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files
012 generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010
or 011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
Free Space on SD Card

013
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
Debug Save When
5858* These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-003 stores one SC specified by number.
Stores SC codes generated by copier engine

001* Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
errors.
Stores SC codes generated by GW controller

002* Controller SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
errors.
003* Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1step]
004* Jam (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores jam errors.
5859* Debug Save Key No.
128
Engine SP Tables-5
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that
use common memory on the controller board.
006 Key 6 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860* SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour]
020
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.
The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received
during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

021
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: No, 1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
account after the SMTP server is validated.
022
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.
129
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Select the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
025 Bit 2: CRAM_MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit 4 to Bit 7: Not Used
• This SP is activated only when SMTP authentication is enabled by UP mode.
S/MIME: MIME Header Setting
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent by S/MIME.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
026
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
S/MIME: Authentication Check
When sending S/MIME mail, specifies whether to check the destination authentication.
028 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not checked
1: Checked
5866 E-Mail Report
Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.

001 Report Validity
Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert
mail.
005 Add Date Field
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Not added, 1: Added
5869 RAM Disk Setting
130
Engine SP Tables-5
Enables or disables the Mail function.

001 Mail Function
5870 Common Key Info Writing
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for
001 Writing
@Remote specifications.
003 Initialize Initializes the data area of the common proof for validating.
SD Card Appli. Move

5873 Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see "SD Card
Appli Move" in the chapter "System Maintenance (Main Chapters).
001 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another.
002 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
5878 Option Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite Security

option for the copier. For more, see
001 Data Overwrite Security
"DataOverwriteSecurity Unit" in the chapter
"Installation".
Fixed Phase Block Erasing

5881
Detects the Fixed phrase.
SD Get Counter
5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The
operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD
card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with the
number of the machine.
001
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
131
Personal Information Protect
Selects the protection level for logs.

5888* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
SDK Application Counter

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
5907 information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be
registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the
setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5919* HDD Encryption
Shows the status of the encryption function for the HDD.

001 [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not Activated
1: Activated
5930 Meter Charge
132
Engine SP Tables-5
001 0: OFF
1: ON
Device Setting
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to
enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into
the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is limited
only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
• Other network applications than @Remote or LDAP/NT

authentication are not available when this SP is set to "2".
Even though you can change the initial settings of those
network applications, the settings do not work
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
SP Print Mode
5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
133
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
SP Text Mode
5992
Writes the SMC sheets into the SD card.
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
026 Print SP
134
Engine SP Tables-6
Engine SP Tables-6
SP6-xxx: Peripherals
Punch Position: Sub Scan

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction. (For D636/D637)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU [-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
004 5-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Punch Position: Main Scan

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction. (For D636/D637)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.4 mm]
004 4-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.

6130*
Adjusts the paper buckle at the punch unit for each paper size. (For D636/D637)
135
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.25 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Skew Correction Control

6131*
Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. (For D636/D637)
136
Engine SP Tables-6
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Jogger Fence Fine Adj.
6132* This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the
finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher D636/D637. The adjustment is done
perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
137
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Staple Position Adjustment
Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (D636/D637).

6133* + Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
[-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
Saddle Stitch Position Adj.

6134* Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled
and folded in the Booklet Finisher (D637).
138
Engine SP Tables-6
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]

+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
003 A4 SEF
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
Folder Position Adj.

6135* This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet
Finisher D637.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]

+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
003 A4 SEF
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
Book Fold Repeat
6136* Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher D637.
[2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
139
Finisher Free Run

6137
These SPs are used for the D588 or D636/D637.
D588: System free run

001 Free Run 1
D636/D637: Free run for paper edge stapling.
D588: Free run for durability testing

002 Free Run 2
D636/D637: Not used
003 Free Run 3 Not used
004 Free Run 4 Not used
Entrance Sensor
6139 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. (D588)
( p.181)
FIN (EUP) INPUT Check

6140 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher.
(D636/D637) ( p.181)
FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check

6144 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. (D588)
( p.190)
FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check

6145 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher.
(D636/D637) ( p.190)
6148 Jogger Fine Adj.
140
Engine SP Tables-6
001 A3T
002 B4T
003 A4T
004 A4Y
005 B5Y
Adjusts the jogger location [Horizontal direction]
006 A5Y
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 /mm]
007 DLT-T
*Jogger is optional equipment.
008 LG-T
009 LT-T
010 LT-Y
011 HLT-Y
012 Other
Max. Pre-Stack Sheet [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheets step]
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149*
• You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick
paper.
6150 Jogger Control
Enables or disables the jogger.

001
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
141
Extra Staples
More than the standard number of sheets can be stapled. This SP sets the additional
number of sheets (This Setting + Standard Number = maximum number of sheets).
• If the number of the maximum for staples is increased, and the mechanical warranty
6830* of the unit can be guaranteed, then the setting can take effect without changing the
controller software.
• However, assurance that mechanical performance can be guaranteed is required
before changing the setting to increase the staple load for more than the maximum
in the feed/exit specifications. Raising this setting without quality assurance could
damage the machine.
Staple positions other than booklet stapling

1
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]
2 Booklet stapling
2
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]
142
Engine SP Tables-7
Engine SP Tables-7
SP7-xxx: Data Log
7401* Total SC Counter
SC Counter
001 Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred.
Total SC Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of service calls that have occurred.
7403* SC History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
7404* SC991 History
143
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the 10 most recently detected SC991 codes.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
7502* Total Paper Jam
Jam Counter
001 Displays the total number of paper jams.
Total Jam Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of paper jams.
Total Jams Location
These SPs display the total number of paper jams by location. A "Check-in" (paper late)
7504* error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time. A "Check-
out" ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer
than the prescribed time.
001 At power On
003 Tray 1: On
004 Tray 2: On
005 Tray 3: On
144
Engine SP Tables-7
006 Tray 4: On
007 LCT: On
008 Bypass: On
009 Duplex: On
017 Registration: On
019 Fusing Exit: On
020 Paper Exit: On
021 Bridge Exit On
022 Bridge Transport: On
024 Junction Gate Sensor: On
025 Duplex Exit: On
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In)
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out)
057 Registration Sensor: Off
058 LCT Feed Sensor: Off
060 Paper Exit: Off
061 Bridge: Exit: Off
062 Bridge: Transport: Off
145
064 Junction Gate Sensor: Off
065 Duplex Exit: Off
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In)
067 Duplex Entrance: Off (Out)
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN
101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN
102 Finisher Staple: KIN
103 Finisher Exit: KIN
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP
194 Finisher Staple Exit: EUP
195 Finisher Exit: EUP
198 Finisher Folder: EUP
199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP
202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: EUP
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP
206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP
146
Engine SP Tables-7
7506* Jam Count by Paper Size
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
7507* Plotter Jam History
147
001 Last
Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
002 Latest 1
Sample Display:
003 Latest 2 CODE:007
004 Latest 3 SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
005 Latest 4
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Latest 5
where:
007 Latest 6 CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.
008 Latest 7 SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.

TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7502)
009 Latest 8
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
010 Latest 9
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
ROM No./Firmware Version

7801 This SP code displays the firmware versions of all ROMs in the system, including the
mainframe, the ARDF, and peripheral devices.
PM Counter Display
7803*
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
Paper [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the paper counter (pages)
Page: PCD [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

002
Displays the PCD (Drum and Development unit) counter (pages)
148
Engine SP Tables-7

003
Displays the transfer unit counter (pages).

004
Displays the fusing unit counter (pages).

005
Displays the PCD rotation counter (distance).

006
Displays the transfer unit rotation counter (distance).

007
Displays the fuser unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation(%): PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]

008
Displays the PCD (%) rotation counter (Distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
009
Displays the transfer unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the fuser unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
011
Displays the web unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
PM Counter Reset
7804 Resets the PM counter.

Touch [Execute] two times > "Completed" > [Exit]
Paper
001
Resets the PM counter of the paper.
PCD
002
Resets the PM counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit except developer).
149
Transfer
003
Resets the PM counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser
004
Resets the PM counter of the fuser unit.
Web
005
Reset the PM counter of the web unit.
All Clear
006
Resets all PM counter
7805 Parts Counter
Page: OPC [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the OPC.
Page: Charge Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

002
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the charge roller.
Page: Developer [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

003
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the developer.
Page: Belt Blade [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

004
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the transfer belt cleaning blade.
Page: Heat Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

005
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the hot roller.
Page: Pressure Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

006
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the pressure roller.
Page: Cleaning Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

007
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the cleaning roller.
Page: Thermistor [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

008
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the thermistors.
150
Engine SP Tables-7
Page: Stripper [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

009
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the strippers.
Rotation: OPC [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

010
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the OPC.
Rotation: Charge Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

011
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the charge roller.
Rotation: Developer [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

012
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the developer.
Rotation: Belt Blade [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

013
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the transfer belt, blade.
Rotation: Heat Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

014
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the hot roller.
Rotation: Pressure Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

015
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the pressure roller.
Rotation: Cleaning Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

016
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the cleaning roller.
Rotation: Thermistor [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

017
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the thermistors.
Rotation: Stripper [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

018
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the strippers.
Page(%): Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]

019
Displays the parts counter (rotations/PM %) of the cleaning web.
7806 Counter Clear
OPC
001
Resets the parts counter of the OPC.
151
Charge Roller
002
Resets the parts counter of the charge roller.
Developer
003
Resets the parts counter of the developer.
Belt: Blade
004
Resets the parts counter of the transfer belt cleaning blade.
Heat Roller
005
Resets the parts counter of the hot roller.
Pressure Roller
006
Resets the parts counter of the pressure roller.
Cleaning Roller
007
Resets the parts counter of the cleaning roller.
Web
008
Resets the parts counter of the cleaning web.
Thermistor
009
Resets the parts counter of the thermistors.
Stripper
010
Resets the parts counter of the strippers.
All Clear
011
Resets all parts counters.
SC/Jam Counter Reset
7807 Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press Execute on the touch panel.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7507, SP7508.
152
Engine SP Tables-7
Self-Diagnose Result Display
7832 Execute to open the "Self-Diagnostics Result Display" to view details about errors. Use
the keys in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all the information. If no
errors have occurred, you will see the "No Error" message on the screen.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
7853 Replacement Counter
PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
001
Displays the replacement counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit).
Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
002
Displays the replacement counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
003
Displays the replacement counter of the fusing unit.
Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
004
Displays the replacement counter of the cleaning web.
zero cross [0 to 255 / 60 / 1 ]

7856* Stores and displays the detected zero cross frequency of the main ac power supply
from the wall socket.
Assert Info. DFU

7901 These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent SC code
generated by the machine.
001* File Name Module name
002* Number of Lines Number of the lines where error occurred.
003* Location Value
7904 Near End Setting
153
001* PCD Toner Near End timing setting

[0 to 2/ 1 / 1 /step]
002* Transfer
0: Earlier
1: Normal
003* Fuser
2: Later
7906 Prev Counter
Page: PCD [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the counter (pages) of the previous PCD

002
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous transfer unit.

003
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous fusing unit.

004
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous PCD

005
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous transfer unit.

006
Rotation(%):PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

007
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous PCD
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

008
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous transfer unit.
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

009
Rotation(%):Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous cleaning web.
154
Engine SP Tables-7
7950 Replacement Date
PCD
001
Displays the replacement date of the PCD.
Transfer
002
Displays the replacement date of the transfer unit.
Fuser
003
Displays the replacement date of the fusing unit.
Web
004
Displays the replacement date of the web unit.
7951 Remaining Counter
PCD(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

001
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the PCD.
Transfer(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

002
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

003
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the fusing unit.
PCD(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

005
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the PCD.
Transfer(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

006
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

007
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the fusing unit.
PCD (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

009
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the PCD.
155
Transfer (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

010
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the transfer unit.
Fuser (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

011
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the fusing unit.
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

013
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the cleaning web.
PM Yield Setting
SP7952
7952
RTB 16:
Default
Sets the each yield of the following.
settings
changed
PCD(Page) [0 to 99999999/ 160000 / 1 sheet]
001
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Pages).
Transfer(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]

002
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Pages).
Fuser(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]

003
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Pages).
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 71990000 / 1 mm]

PCD(Rotation)
005 C2c: [0 to 999999999 / 75500000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Rotations).
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 62770000 / 1 mm]

Transfer(Rotation)
006 C2c: [0 to 999999999 / 65420000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Rotations).
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 54880000 / 1 mm]

Fuser(Rotation)
007 C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 55800000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Rotations).
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 92 / 1 %]

009
Sets the PM yield (%) of the web unit.
156
Engine SP Tables-7
7953 Operation Env Log
T<10 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

001
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: T<10°C
10<=T<=17 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

002
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 10°C<=T<=17°C
17<T<23 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

003
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 17<=T<=23
23<=T<=27 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

004
27<=T<=32 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

005
32<T [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

006
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 32<T
Env Log Clear

7954
Resets the environment logs (SP7953).
157
Engine SP Tables-8
SP8-XXX: Data Log2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color
faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others,
can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that
you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F,

T: Total: (Grand Total).
P, etc.).
P: Print application.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in the
example) future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the
small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and
refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
158
Engine SP Tables-8
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to

DesApl
store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count
up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number
GPC
that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up
11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
159
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
ImgEdt
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines

NRS
remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print
jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and
Palm 2
allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different
formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
PGS count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
R
machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
160
Engine SP Tables-8
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
SMC
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
• All of the Group 8 SPs are able to reset by “SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear”.
T:Total Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of times each
8001 application is used to do a job.
8004 P:Total Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer using
the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is counted
at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
161
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application, over
the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored

806x 1 Sort copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the document
server, the L: counter increments. (See SP8-066-1)
806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine

806x 4 Booklet
is in staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the

8 06x 5 Z-Fold
Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is

806x 6 Punch set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See
SP8-064-6.)
806x 7 Other (Reserved)
806x 8 Inside-Flod Not used
806x 9 Three-In-Fold Not used
806x 10 Three-OUT-Fold Not used
806x 11 Four-Fold Not used
806x 12 KANNON-Fold Not used
806x 13 Perfect-Bind Not used
806x 14 Ring-Bind Not used
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job,
162
Engine SP Tables-8
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number
of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web Image
Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
807x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
807x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
807x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
807x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
807x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
807x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the
error occurs.
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted.
8381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
by the customer. The counter for the
8384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL application used for storing the pages
increments.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
8387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
with the Store File button from within the
Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted
as 2.
163
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for
the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following
pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/

back counted as 1 page) used for duplex
8411 Prints/Duplex *CTL printing. Last pages printed only on one side
are not counted.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the printer application.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by Other applications
842x 1 Simplex> Duplex
164
Engine SP Tables-8
842x 4 Simplex Combine
842x 5 Duplex Combine
842x 6 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
842x 12 Booklet
842x 13 Magazine
• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their
compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
165
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below,
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

the print application.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Other applications.
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count

843x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or

843x 2 Series/Book
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were

843x 3 User Stamp
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8441
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications.
166
Engine SP Tables-8
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
844x 1 A3
844x 2 A4
844x 3 A5
844x 4 B4
844x 5 B5
844x 6 DLT
844x 7 LG
844x 8 LT
844x 9 HLT
844x 10 Full Bleed
844x 254 Other (Standard)
844x 255 Other (Custom)
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
8451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Bypass Tray
001 Bypass Tray *CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Tray 1 *CTL Copier
003 Tray 2 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
167
004 Tray 3 *CTL Paper Tray Unit (Option)
005 Tray 4 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
LCT (Option)
006 Tray 5 *CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on
8461 feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However,
these counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8464
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
846x 1 Normal
846x 2 Recycled
846x 3 Special
168
Engine SP Tables-8
846x 4 Thick
846x 5 Normal (Back)
846x 6 Thick (Back)
846x 7 OHP
846x 8 Other
PrtPGS/Mag
8471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 < 49% *CTL
002 50% to 99% *CTL
003 100% *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 101% to 200% *CTL
005 201% < *CTL
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also
counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of
100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application.
169
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8511
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8514
8 51x 1 RPCS
8 51x 2 RPDL
8 51x 3 PS3
8 51x 4 R98
8 51x 5 R16
8 51x 6 GL/GL2
8 51x 7 R55
8 51x 8 RTIFF
8 51x 9 PDF
8 51x 10 PCL5e/5c
8 51x 11 PCL XL
8 51x 12 IPDL-C
8 51x 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 51x 14 Other
8 51x 15 IPDS
• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
170
Engine SP Tables-8
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
8 52x 8 Inside Fold Half-Fold (FM2) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 9 Three-IN-Fold Letter Fold-in (FM4) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 10 Three-OUT-Fold Letter Fold-out (FM3) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 11 Four Fold Double Parallel Fold (FM5) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 12 KANNON-Fold Gate Fold (FM6) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 13 Perfect-Bind Perfect Binder
8 52x 14 Ring-Bind Ring Binder
• If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are
still counted.
• The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are
counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by

8531 Staples *CTL the machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8551 T:FIN Books
171

Not used
002 Ring-Bind *CTL
8554 T:FIN Books

Not used
002 Ring-Bind *CTL
8561 T:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8564 P:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8567 O:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter
8581 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
172
Engine SP Tables-8
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
O:Counter
8591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed, and
the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.
001 A3/DLT *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Duplex *CTL
T: Coverage Counter
8601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for each
printing mode.
001 B/W *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
011 B/W Printing Pages *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
P:Coverage Counter
8604
-
001 B/W *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
SDK Apli Counter

8617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK application.
001 SDK-1 *CTL
002 SDK-2 *CTL
003 SDK-3 *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 SDK-4 *CTL
005 SDK-5 *CTL
006 SDK-6 *CTL
Func Use Counter

8621
-
173

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
174
Engine SP Tables-8

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
175

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
176
Engine SP Tables-8
Dev Counter
8771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers) for
black and other color toners.
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Toner_Bottle_Info. *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001
through 004 are the same.
001 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles
Toner Remain
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user to
8801 check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better than
other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10% steps).
001 K *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% /step]
Eco Counter
8811
-
001 Eco Total *CTL
004 Duplex *CTL
005 Combine *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008 Duplex (%) *CTL
009 Combine (%) *CTL
010 Paper Cut (%) *CTL
101 Eco Totalr:Last *CTL
104 Duplex:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
105 Combine:Last *CTL
177
108 Duplex (%):Last *CTL
109 Combine (%):Last *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% /step]
110 Paper Cut (%):Last *CTL
Cvr Cnt: 0-10%

from 0% to 10%.
011 0 to 2%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021 3 to 4%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
031 5 to 7%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
041 8 to 10%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 11-20%

from 11% to 20%.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 21-30%

from 21% to 30%.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 31%-

31% or higher.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Page/Toner Bottle
8891
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
178
Engine SP Tables-8
Page/Toner_prev1
8901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Page/Toner_prev2
8911
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Cvr Cnt/Total
8921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Coverage (%) Bk *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
011 Coverage /P: Bk *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode. These
SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement
in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while

001 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller

002 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing

003 Energy Save Time
background printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.

004 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing background
printing.
Includes time while machine is performing background

005 Off Mode Time printing. Does not include time machine remains
powered off with the power switches.
179
006 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Total time when paper jams have been staying during

007 PrtJam
printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying during

008 OrgJam
scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
Electricity Status
8961
-
001 Ctrl Standby Time *CTL
002 STR Time *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003 Main Power Off Time *CTL
004 Reading and Printing Time *CTL
005 Printing Time *CTL
006 Reading Time *CTL
007 Eng Waiting Time *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008 Low Power State Time *CTL
009 Silent State Time *CTL
Admin. Counter List

8999
-
001 Total
007 Printer: BW
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012 A3/DLT
013 Duplex
027 Printer: BW(%) [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
180
Input Check
Input Check
Copier
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to
a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Input Check
5803 Reading
Description
0 1
Tray 1:
005
Tray 1:
006
Tray 2:
011
Tray 2:
012
181
017 LCT: Paper Feed Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
022 Relay Sensor: LCT No paper detected Paper detected
023 By-pass: Paper End Sensor Not end Paper end
024 By-pass: Paper Size Sensor See the table 3 following this table.
025 Registration Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
026 Fusing Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
027 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
028 Junction Gate Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
029 Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
030 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
031 Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
032 Duplex Unit Open/Close Open Close
033 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
034 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
035 Bank Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
036 Tray Cover Open/Close Close Open
037 LCT Set Set Not set
038 Bridge/Exit Tray: Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
182
Input Check
039 Bridge/Exit Tray: Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
040 Bridge/Exit/Shift: Set Detection Set Not set
Bridge/Exit Tray: Left Guide Open/

041 Close Open
Close
Bridge/Exit Tray: Right Guide

042 Close Open
Open/Close
043 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor Not HP HP
046 Fusing Unit Set Set (Bit1) Not set (Bit1)
047 Toner Overflow Sensor Not full Full

open. close.

open. close.
055 New U. Det. :PCDU
057 Cleaning Web End Not end End
058 Punch Switch
065 Bypass Tray Paper Length Detection Paper detected No paper detected
200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor
0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full 0 0
Nearly full 1 0
Near end 1 1
Almost empty 0 1
183
Table 2: Paper Size Switch
Switch 1 is used for the tray set detection.

11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 0 1
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2 B4 SEF *2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 1 0
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 0 0
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-002
(Tray 1) or -006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-003
(Tray 1) or -007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-001 (Tray 1) or -005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-004 (Tray 1) or -008 (Tray 2)..
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)
Models Bit No.
184
Input Check
North America Europe/Asia 3 2 1 0
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 1 0
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 0 0
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 1 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (A5 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 0 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (B5 LEF)
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 1 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 0 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 0 1 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 1 1 1 1
• *1: When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is "LEF", it considers that the paper
size is bracketed size.
APS Original Size Detection
Width
Original Size Length Sensor SP4-301
Sensor
display
Metric version Inch version L3 L2 L1 W1 W2
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 00011111
B4 10" x 14" O O O O X 00011110
F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x 13",
or 8" x 13" 8.5" x 14" O O O X X 00011100
SP 5126 controls the
size that is detected
A4 LEF 8.5" x 11" X X X O O 00000011
185
B5 LEF - X X X O X 00000010
A4 SEF 11" x 8.5" X O O X X 00001100
B5 SEF - X X O X X 00000100
5.5" x 8.5", 8.5"

A5 LEF/ SEF X X X X X 00000000
x 5.5"
Options
3000/2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)
Reading
0 1
001 Entrance Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
002 Proof Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
003 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
No paper
004 Upper Tray Exit Sensor Paper detected*1
detected*1
005 Staple Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
006 Shift Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
007 Shift Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
008 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
009 Lower Tray Height Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
010 Upper Tray Height Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
011 Upper Tray Full Sensor Not Full Full
012 Stack Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
013 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
014 Feed Out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP
186
Input Check
Reading
0 1
015 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
016 Corner Stapler HP Sensor Not HP HP
017 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor Not HP HP
018 Upper Tray Limit SW Not Limit Limit
019 Door Switch Closed Open
020 Corner Stapler Operation Not HP HP
021 Staple Detection No staple detected Staple detected
022 Staple Dip Detection No staple detected Staple detected
023 Punch Movement HP Sensor Not HP HP
024 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor Not HP HP
025 Paper Position Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
026 Punch Full Sensor Not Full Full
027 Punch HP Sensor Not HP HP
030 Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor Not HP HP
031 Stack Present Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
032 Clamp Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
033 Fold Entrance Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
034 Bottom Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP
035 Fold Cam HP Sensor Not HP HP
036 Fold Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
037 Fold Unit Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
187
Reading
0 1
No paper
038 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Front Paper detected*2
detected*2
No paper
039 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Rear Paper detected*2
detected*2
040 Booklet Stapler 1: Operation Not HP HP
041 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Front) No staple detected Staple detected

Edge)
Booklet Stapler 1: Operation (Rotation/

043 Not HP HP
Rear)
044 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Rear) No staple detected Staple detected

Edge/Rear)
046 Upper Tray Full Sensor: 3000 Not Full Full
047 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Front - -
048 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Rear - -
049 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Upper - -
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type
0 0 Japan
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (D637 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "3000/2000 (Booklet)
Finisher".
188
Input Check
Reading
0 1
001 Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
Shift Exit Sensor

002 No paper detected Paper detected
(Lower Tray Exit Sensor)
Staple Entrance Sensor

003 Paper detected No paper detected
(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor)
Staple Moving HP Sensor

004 Not HP HP
(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
005 Not HP HP
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
006 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP
007 Staple Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
Staple Rotation Sensor

008 Not HP HP
(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
009 Staple Sensor Staple detected No staple detected
010 Staple READY Detection Staple detected No staple detected
Exit Guide Plate HP

011 Not HP HP
(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
012 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper Sensor No output tray Output tray

013
(Stack Height Sensor) detected detected
Tray Lower Sensor

014 Lower limit Not lower limit
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
Proof Full Sensor

015 Not full Full
(Paper Limit Sensor)
189
Output Check
Copier
5804 Output Check
001 Exit Motor: 350
002 Exit Motor: 175
003 Exit Motor: 230

Paper exit motor (Mainframe)
004 Exit Motor: 180
005 Exit Motor: 154
006 Exit Motor: 90
007 Feed Motor: 300
008 Feed Motor: 255
009 Feed Motor: 230
010 Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Mainframe)
011 Feed Motor: 180
012 Feed Motor: 154
013 Feed Motor: 90

Paper feed motor (Optional paper feed
unit)
190
Output Check
5804 Output Check
024 LCT: Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Optional LCT)

Paper feed clutch 1/2 (Mainframe)
030 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 3 Paper feed clutch 3/4 (Optional paper
031 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 4 feed unit)
032 LCT: Paper Feed Clutch Paper feed clutch (Optional LCT)

Pick-up Solenoid 1/2 (Mainframe)
035 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 3 Pick-up Solenoid 3/4 (Optional paper

036 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 4 feed unit)
037 LCT: Pick-up Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (LCT)

-
042 Paper Tray Lock Solenoid Not used
Tray lock solenoid (Optional paper

043 Bank: Paper Tray Lock Solenoid
feed unit)
191
5804 Output Check

-
048 Exit: Junction Gate Solenoid Junction gate 1 solenoid
049 Duplex: Inverter Gate Solenoid Not used

-

-
066 By-pass Feed Clutch -
067 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid -
192
Output Check
5804 Output Check
068 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: 230

Drive motor (Bridge unit)
072 Bridge/Exit Tray: Junction Gate Solenoid Junction Gate Solenoid (Bridge unit)
073 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: Reset -
074 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: Enable -
075 Bridge: Cooling Fan Motor Not used
076 Transfer Belt Contact Motor -
077 OPC Motor: 230
078 OPC Motor: 180

Drum motor
079 OPC Motor: 154
080 OPC Motor: 90

-

-
089 Development Puddle Motor -
090 PTL Control -
091 Fusing Fan Motor: High

Fusing exhaust fan motor
092 Fusing Fan Motor: Low
193
5804 Output Check
093 Exhaust Fan Motor: High

Exhaust fan motor
094 Exhaust Fan Motor: Low
095 Duct Fan Motor Cooling fan motor
096 Exit Fan Motor: High

Paper exit cooling fan motor
097 Exit Fan Motor: Low
098 PSU Fan Motor -

-
104 LD 1
-
105 LD 2
106 Toner Bottle Motor: Fwd Toner supply motor
107 Quenching Lamp -
108 Charge Bias -
109 Development Bias -
110 Transfer Belt Voltage -
111 ID Sensor LED -
115 Cleaning Web Motor Web motor
117 CTL Cooling FAN Controller fan
Output Check
6144
Display Description
194
Output Check
001 Upper Relay Motor Upper Transport Motor
002 Lower Relay Motor Lower Transport Motor
003 Exit Motor -
004 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
005 Lower Tray Lift Motor -
007 Stapler Motor -
008 Stapler Hammer -
009 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid -
011 Stack Feed-out Motor -
012 Shift Motor -
3000 /2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)
Output
6145
Display Description
001 Entrance Motor -
002 Upper Transport Motor -
003 Lower Transport Motor -
004 Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor -
005 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor -
006 Shift Roller Motor -
008 Upper Tray Lift Motor -
195
009 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor -
011 Feed Out Belt Motor -
012 Corner Stapler Movement Motor -
013 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor -
014 Corner Stapler -
015 Proof Junction Gate Solenoid -
016 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid -
017 Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid -
019 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid -
020 Stack Junction Gate Motor -
021 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor -
022 Booklet Stapler: Front -
023 Booklet Stapler: Rear -
024 Fold Plate Motor -
025 Fold Roller Motor -
026 Positioning Roller Motor -
027 Punch Drive Motor -
028 Punch Movement Motor -
029 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor -
030 Exit Jogger Motor: Front -
031 Exit Jogger Motor: Rear -
032 Exit Jogger Motor Release Motor -
196
Test Pattern Printing
Test Pattern Printing

Printing Test pattern: SP2-109
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design
testing.
• Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an SC
occurs.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
3. When you want to select the single color of Magenta, Yellow or Cyan for printing a test pattern,
select the color with SP2-109-005 (2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan).
4. When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern, select the density with
SP2-109-006 to -009 for each color.
• If you select "0" with SP2-109-006 to -009, the color to be adjusted to "0" does not come up
on a test pattern.
5. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, touch "Yes" to select the test pattern for printing.
6. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print (paper
size etc.).
• If you want to use black and white printing, touch "Black & White" on the LCD. If you want to
use color printing, touch "Full Colour" on the LCD.
7. Press the "Start" key to start the test print.
8. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to the SP mode display.
9. Reset all settings to the default values.
10. Touch "Exit" twice to exit SP mode.
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 11 Independent Pattern (1-dot)
1 Vertial Line (1dot) 12 Independent Pattern (2-dot)
2 Vertial Line (2dot) 13 Independent Pattern (4-dot)
3 Horizontal Line (1dot) 14 Triming Area
197
4 Horizontal Line (2dot) 16 Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 17 Band (Horizontal)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 18 Band (Vertical)
7 Grid Pattern Small 19 Checker Flag Pattern
8 Grid Pattern Large 20 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 21 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern
198
MEMO
199
MEMO
200 EN

Ricoh sp8300 Field Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh sp8300 Field Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh sp8300 Field Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model AL-P2

Machine Code: M132

Prevention of Physical Injury

Health Safety Conditions

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:

• FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR

Item Callout Key Machine Code

Item Callout Key Machine Code

Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit [2] C D580

2000-sheet LCT [3] C D581

1200-sheet LCT [4] C D631

Bridge Unit [5] C D634

1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 1) [6] C D588

External 3000-Sheet Finisher (See Note 1) [7] C D636

-Output Jogger Unit (See Note 2) [8] C B703

Memory Unit 512 MB - C D594

IPDS Unit - C M416

Internal VM Card - C D640

IEEE 802.11a/g, g - C M344

IEEE 1284 - C B679

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with

Different Points from Predecessor Products

Controller Type GW+ Controller GW Controller

Operation Panel 4.3” touch panel includes USB/SD 4-line LCD

USB2.0/SD Slot Standard Not supported

Light Detect Function Available Not supported

SMC data SD card down load or printing Printing only

Safety Shut Down Available Not Available

PDF Direct Standard Not supported

Data Overwrite Security Standard Option

HDD Encryption Standard Option

1 Paper Exit Sensor 17 By-pass Feed Roller

2 Paper Overflow Sensor 18 By-pass Separation Roller

3 Junction Gate 1 19 Duplex/by-pass transport roller

4 Junction Jam Sensor 20 Upper Relay Belt

5 Duplex Inverter Gate 21 Feed Roller

6 Junction Gate 2 22 Separation Roller

7 Duplex Entrance Sensor 23 Pick-up Roller

8 Duplex Inverter Roller 24 Bottom Plate

9 Hot Roller 25 Development Unit

10 Pressure Roller 26 Charge Roller

11 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 27 F Mirror

12 Duplex Transport Roller 28 Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)

13 Transfer Belt 29 Polygonal Mirror Motor

14 OPC Drum 30 Laser Unit

15 Registration Roller 31 Toner Bottle Holder

16 By-pass Pick-up Roller 32 Fusing Exit Sensor

3 Large Capacity Tray (LCT: 1200-sheet)

4 Paper Tray Unit

1 Paper Exit Motor 9 Paper Feed Clutch 2

2 Fusing Motor 10 Paper Feed Clutch 1

3 Web Motor 11 Feed Motor

4 Transfer/Development Motor 12 By-pass Paper Feed Clutch

5 Drum Motor 13 Registration Motor